YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
RX-V659
Printed in Malaysia WG73810
RX-V659
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
G
QUAD 60157
QUASAR 60029
RADIOLA 60157
RADIOTONE 60625
RCA 60032, 60179
REALISTIC 60179
RESTEK 60157
REVOX 60157
ROTEL 60157, 60897
SAE 60157
SAMSUNG 60524
SANSUI 60157, 60625
SANYO 60179
SEG 60625
SHARP 60034
SHERWOOD 60426
SIEMENS 60157, 60362
SIMAUDIO 60157
SONIC FRONTIERS
60157
SONY 60000
STS 60018
SUPERTECH 60625
SYNERGY 60625
TAG MCLAREN
60157
TANDY 60032
TEAC 60362, 60393,
60625, 60643
TECHNICS 60029, 60207,
60303
TECHWOOD 60362
THORENS 60157
THULE AUDIO60157
TOSHIBA 60299, 60481
TRAXDATA 60626
UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362,
60524
WARDS 60000, 60032,
60157, 60179
YAMAHA 60036, 61907
YBA 60625
CD RECORDER
DENON 70626, 70766
HHB 70192
JVC 71294
KENWOOD 70626
LG 71208
MARANTZ 70626
NAD 71208
PHILIPS 70626
PIONEER 70192, 71087
RCA 70420
SONY 70000
TDK 71208
TEAC 70420
VICTOR 70072, 71294
YAMAHA 70888, 71292
MD RECORDER
DENON 70873
KENWOOD 70681
OPTIMUS 71063
PIONEER 71063
SHARP 70861, 71684
SONY 70490
TECHNICS 71078
YAMAHA 70490, 70888,
71909
TAPE DECK
AIWA 70029, 70197
AKAI 70189, 70283
ARCAM 70076
CARVER 70029
DENON 70076
EROICA 70189
GARRARD 70308, 70309
GRUNDIG 70029
HARMAN/KARDON
70029
INKEL 70070
JVC 70244, 70273
KENWOOD 70070, 70205
MAGNAVOX 70029
MARANTZ 70029
MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283
MYRYAD 70029
ONKYO 70135, 70282
OPTIMUS 70027, 70220
ORION 70308, 70309
PANASONIC 70229
PHILIPS 70029, 70229
PIONEER 70027, 70220
POLK AUDIO 70029
RADIOLA 70029
RCA 70027, 70220
REVOX 70029
SANSUI 70029
SHARP 70205, 70231
SONY 70170, 70243
TEAC 70283, 70289,
70308, 70309
TECHNICS 70229
THORENS 70029
VICTOR 70244, 70273
WARDS 70027, 70029
YAMAHA 70097, 70205,
70524
TUNER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
81467
AIWA 80158, 80189
AKAI 80115, 80609
ANAM 80281, 80609
ARCAM 80189
CAIRN 80189
CAMBRIDGE 80189
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
81455, 81647
CARVER 80189
DENON 80004, 80273
DUAL 80004
GARRARD 80281
GOLDMUND 80189
GOLDSTAR 80281
GOODMANS 80609
GRADIENTE 80281
GRUNDIG 80189, 80281
HARMAN/KARDON
80110, 80189
INKEL 80027, 80066
JBL 80110
JVC 80074
KENWOOD 80027, 80645
LG 80281
LINN 80189
LOEWE 80189
MAGNAVOX 80189
MARANTZ 80189
MEMOREX 80014
MICROMEGA 80189
MUSICAL FIDELITY
80445
MYRYAD 80189
NAD 80320, 80609
NIKKO 80609
ONKYO 80103, 80119
PANASONIC 80309, 80518
PHILIPS 80189
PIONEER 80014
POLK AUDIO 80189
RADIOLA 80189
RESTEK 80189
REVOX 80140, 80189
SANSUI 80189, 80609
SHERWOOD 80066
SIEMENS 80609
SONIC 80281
SONY 80158
SOUNDWAVE 80609
TEAC 80110, 80609
TECHNICS 80309, 80518,
81135
TECHWOOD 80281, 80609
THORENS 80189
UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281,
80609
VICTOR 80074
WARDS 80014, 80158,
80189
YAMAHA 80293, 81908
(TUNER ID1) 81916
(TUNER ID2) 81917
ZENITH 80281
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
YAMAHA (iPod) 81981
RX-V659_G_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, December 7, 2005 11:09 AM
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at
least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20
cm on the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,
motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping
or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and
liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and
may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.
The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power
cable plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release
it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then
disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off. In this state, this unit is
designed to consume a very small quantity of power.
Note
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
1
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Front panel display .................................................... 9
Rear panel ................................................................ 11
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12
Placing speakers....................................................... 12
Connecting speakers ................................................ 13
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 17
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 18
Connecting a TV...................................................... 19
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder,
a VCR or an STB................................................. 20
Connecting a CD player, an MD player,
a tape deck or a turntable..................................... 23
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 24
Connecting an external amplifier............................. 25
Connecting a multi-format player
or an external decoder ......................................... 26
Connecting a game console, a video camera
or a portable audio player.................................... 27
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 28
Connecting the power cable..................................... 29
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 30
Turning on and off the power .................................. 31
AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32
Connecting the optimizer microphone..................... 32
Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 33
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 38
USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 40
Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 40
Muting the audio output........................................... 40
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 40
Selecting the input mode ......................................... 41
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 41
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 42
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode .................................................... 43
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 44
Enjoying multi-channel sources
in 2-channel stereo............................................... 45
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 45
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 45
USING VIDEO FEATURES ............................... 46
Displaying the input source information ................. 46
Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 47
Playing video sources in the background ................ 47
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND.....................48
Enjoying multi-channel sources in surround ........... 48
Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 49
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 50
RECORDING........................................................51
FM/AM TUNING..................................................52
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 52
Manual tuning.......................................................... 53
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 54
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 55
Selecting preset stations........................................... 56
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 57
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
(U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)........59
Selecting the Radio Data System program .............. 59
Using the Radio Data System station network ........ 60
Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 61
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................63
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 63
Sound field program descriptions............................ 64
Changing sound field parameter settings................. 66
Sound field program speaker layouts ...................... 72
SET MENU ............................................................76
Using SET MENU................................................... 78
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 79
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 85
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 87
ADVANCED SETUP............................................90
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................92
Controlling this unit, a TV,
or other components ............................................ 92
Setting the remote control code ............................... 94
Setting library codes ................................................ 95
Resetting all remote control codes........................... 96
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION.....97
Connecting Zone 2................................................... 97
Controlling Zone 2................................................... 99
USING iPod
®
.......................................................101
Setting the remote control code ............................. 101
Controlling iPod .................................................... 101
RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................103
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................104
GLOSSARY.........................................................111
Audio information ................................................. 111
Video information.................................................. 112
Sound field program information .......................... 113
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................114
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FEATURES
2
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)
Front: 100 W + 100 W
Center: 100 W
Surround: 100 W + 100 W
Surround back: 100 W + 100 W
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/
24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
Radio Data System
(U.K. and Europe models only)
◆ Radio Data System tuning capability
iPod controlling capability
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click
and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
Other features
◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi stereo sound with analog and
PCM sources
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video
→ component video) capability for monitor out
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes,
backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK
terminal) controlling capability
◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2
using ZONE CONTROL
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button
names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital
Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
FEATURES
Notes
iPod
®
GETTING STARTED
3
INTRODUCTION
English
Check that you received all of the following parts.
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries
(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes
dim.
• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code
and program any acquired functions that may have been
cleared.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
Installing batteries in the remote control
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AU X DVR
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
VCR
PHONO
ON SCREEN
Remote control
Batteries (2)
(AA, R6, UM-3)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia
and General models)
AM loop antenna
(except for U.K. model)
Indoor FM antenna
(Europe, Australia and
Korea models)
Optimizer microphone
1
3
2
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4
1 MASTER ON/OFF
Turns on or off this unit (see page 31).
2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 31).
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
3 OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
optimizer microphone in the “AUTO SETUP” procedure
(see page 32).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8).
5 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this unit
(see page 9).
6 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT
• Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 52).
• Selects the speaker channel whose output level you
want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the
input source (see page 42).
7 PRESET/TUNING l / h, LEVEL +/–
• Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)
when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The
colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see
page 52).
• Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is
selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not
displayed in the front panel display (see page 52).
• Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using
NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input
source (see page 42).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
ON/OFF
3145687
IJKGFD
A
L
B
C
2
EH
90
MN
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5
INTRODUCTION
English
8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this
button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset
tuning (see page 54).
9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator
is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is
turned off) (see page 52).
0 ZONE 2 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 99).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
A ZONE CONTROL
Switches the zone you want to control between the main
zone and Zone 2 (see page 99).
y
When Zone 2 is selected, the ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front
panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is
flashing, perform the desired operation.
B VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
y
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
C PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones (see page 40).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
D SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time
the corresponding button is pressed.
E PRESET/TUNING, EDIT
• Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
between selecting preset station numbers and selecting
the tuning frequency.
• Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 57).
F STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 45).
G FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM when
“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 52).
H PROGRAM selector
Selects sound field programs or adjusts the bass/treble
balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see
page 39).
I TONE CONTROL
Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right,
center, presence left and right and subwoofer channels in
conjunction with the PROGRAM selector
(see page 39).
J INPUT MODE
Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or
sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input
signals and select the corresponding input signals when
one component is connected via both digital and analog
connections (see page 41).
K INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source.
L MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 44).
The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes
priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the
front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control).
M PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 45).
N VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console or a video camera
(see page 27).
y
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
Note
Notes
Note
Note
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6
This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 92.
The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the component selector switch position. Set the
component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch to SOURCE
and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
■ Controlling this unit
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this
unit.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate (see page 8).
2 CODE SET
Use to set up remote control codes (see page 94).
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source you want to control.
The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected
input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press
any buttons on the remote control, showing which source
component is currently being operated.
4 Sound field program selector buttons
Select sound field programs (see page 63).
– Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in
surround (see page 49).
– Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and
6.1/7.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources
(see page 48).
– Use PURE DIRECT to turn on or off the Pure Direct
mode (see page 45).
5 SPEAKERS
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this
button repeatedly to toggle as follows:
6 ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 43).
7 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
output level (see page 42).
Remote control
Note
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
VCR
PHONO
ON SCREEN
ENHANCER
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
0
A
B
C
D
F
E
G
H
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
I
L
K
Note
A on B on
A and B off
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7
INTRODUCTION
English
8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER
Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or
the “SET MENU” parameters.
9 RETURN
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
“SET MENU” parameters.
0 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
A STANDBY
Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 31).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
B POWER
Turns on this unit (see page 31).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
C SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 41).
D MULTI CH IN
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external
decoder, etc. (see page 44).
E VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
F Component selector switch
Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons
in the shaded area.
AMP
Operates this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (see page 93).
TV
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or
PHONO (see page 92).
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 94.
• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and
PHONO (see page 94), priority is given to the one set for DTV/
CBL.
G MUTE
Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level (see page 40).
H STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 45).
I NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 40).
J SET MENU
Enters “SET MENU” (see page 78).
K ON SCREEN
Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video
monitor (see page 47).
L Radio Data System tuning buttons
(U.K. and Europe models only)
FREQ/TEXT
Switches the Radio Data System display between the
PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the
station offers the corresponding data services) and the
frequency display (see page 61).
PTY SEEK MODE
Sets this unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 59).
PTY SEEK START
Starts searching for a station once the desired program
type is selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 59).
EON
Selects a program type (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or
SPORT) for automatic tuning (see page 60).
Note
Note
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8
■ Controlling the TUNER functions
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then
press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
4 Numeric buttons
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations.
7 BAND
Switches the reception band between FM and AM
(see page 52).
8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i
Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and
u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8)
(see page 56).
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Notes
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
ON/OFF
30 30
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
VCR
PHONO
ON SCREEN
FREQ/TEXT MODE
PTY SEEK
START
EON
Approximately 6 m
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9
INTRODUCTION
English
1 Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit function.
2 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (see page 43).
3 Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
4 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 50).
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
6 DOCK indicator
Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit
(see page 24).
7 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 40).
8 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program (see page 64).
9 YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without
any modifications (see page 32).
0 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode
(see page 52).
A TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station
(see page 52).
B STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit
(see page 52).
C MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 54).
D VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
E PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
Front panel display
p
VCR
p
DVR
p
DVD
p
CD
p
V-AUX
p
DTV/CBL
p
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
p
PHONO
96
24
q PL
q EX
q PL
ENHANCER
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA
ZONE2 NIGHT
DOCK
STANDARD
AUTO
YPAO
PSHOLD RT
EON
PTYPTY
TUNED
MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q PL x
A B
SP
mS
ft
dB
96/24
HiFi DSP
LFE
LCR
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
dB
STEREO
CT
2
H
EI
GJKL NMPO
R
D
F
1345 768 B
0A9C
Q
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Surround left
DSP sound field
Surround right
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10
F STANDARD indicator
Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR.
ENHANCED” program is selected (see page 49).
G SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
H Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 40).
I ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 99).
J NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode
(see page 40).
K HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 64).
L Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
M SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 41).
N MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 40).
O 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
P Input channel and speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Light up according to the number of presence and
surround back speakers set for “PRESENCE SP” (see
page 80) and “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 80) in
“SOUND MENU” when “TEST” in “SOUND
MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 83).
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back
speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see
page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for “PRESENCE SP”
(see page 80) and “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 80) in “SOUND
MENU”.
Q LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
R Radio Data System indicators
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Lights up when the Radio Data System data is being
received.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
LL C R
SL SB SR
Presence speaker indicator
Input channel indicator
Surround back speaker indicator
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
11
INTRODUCTION
English
1 Audio component jacks
See page 23 for connection information.
2 DOCK terminal
Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be
stationed.
See page 24 for connection information.
3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
See pages 19 and 20 for connection information.
4 REMOTE jacks
See page 97 for details.
5 Antenna terminals
See page 28 for connection information.
6 CONTROL OUT jack
This is a control expansion terminal for custom
installation.
7 PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker terminals
See page 15 for connection information.
8 PRE OUT jacks
See page 25 for connection information.
9 AC OUTLET(S)
Use to supply power to your other audiovisual
components.
See page 29 for details.
0 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
See page 23 for connection information.
A DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See page 20 for connection information.
B MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 26 for connection information.
C ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks
See page 97 for connection information.
These jacks output analog signals only.
D Video component jacks
See pages 19 and 20 for connection information.
E Speaker terminals
See page 13 for connection information.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
See page 29 for details.
Rear panel
AUDIO AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
DVD
DVD
CD
COAXIAL
DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
FRONT
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/
CD-R
CD
DVD
VIDEO
75Ω UNBAL.
FM
ANT
AM
ANTGND
TUNER
DTV/
CBL
IN
DVR
OUT
IN
VCR
OUT
CENTER
DIGITAL OUTPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE 2
OUTPUT
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
FRONT
A
B
PRESENCE/ZONE2
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SINGLE
PRE OUT
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
OPTICAL
DOCK
OUTIN
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
MONITOR OUT
DTV/
CBL
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
DVR
PHONO
GND
E
7
8
6
54
3
2
1
D
C
B
A0
9
Note
CONNECTIONS
12
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
*
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
*
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union).
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the
center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as
close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or
under it.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m above the
floor.
Surround back left and right speakers
(SBL and SBR)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm apart.
Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as that
of the front speakers.
Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the
front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by
CINEMA DSP (see page 64). These effects include
sounds that filmmakers intent to locate a little farther back
behind the screen in order to create more theater-like
ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room
about 0.5 – 1 m outside the front speakers, facing slightly
inward, and about 1.8 m above the floor.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass
frequencies from any or all channels, but also for hi-fi
stereo sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS
sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical,
because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it
is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers.
Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce
wall reflections.
CONNECTIONS
Placing speakers
SW
FR
PR
PL
FL
SBR
SBL
SL
SR
C
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
1.8 m
30 cm (12 in) or more
13
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be
unnatural and lack bass.
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 31).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this
unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the
monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit
(see page 30).
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the
plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
• The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 79 and 80)
are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81).
• You can use the PRESENCE/ZONE2 terminals to connect the Zone 2 speakers (see page 98).
Connecting speakers
Notes
CAUTION
FRONT
A
B
PRESENCE/ZONE2
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
23
1
6 7 10
98
4 5
Subwoofer
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back
speakers
LeftRight
LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
LeftRight
Presence speakers
LeftRight
14
CONNECTIONS
FRONT terminals
Connect one or two front speaker systems (6, 7) to these
terminals. If you use only one front speaker system,
connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker (8) to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect a surround back speakers (9, 10) to these
terminals.
PRESENCE/ZONE2 terminals
Connect presence speakers (2, 3) to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (1) (such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System) to this jack.
1
6
2
3
7
9
10
5
4
8
Speaker layout
15
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
■ Connecting the speaker cable
1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then
twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
2 Loosen the knob.
3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
■ Connecting to the PRESENCE/ZONE2
speaker terminals
Connect presence speakers to these terminals.
y
You can also use these terminals to connect the Zone 2 speakers
(see page 97).
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
3 Close the tab to secure the wire.
10 mm
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
16
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting the banana plug
(except U.K., Europe and Asia models)
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables.
y
You can also use the banana plug with the PRESENCE/ZONE2
speaker terminals. Open the tab and then insert one banana plug
into the hole on the side of each terminal. Do not close the tab
after connecting the banana plug.
1 Tighten the knob.
2 Insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
Banana plug
17
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL
and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz
sampling digital signals.
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber
optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the
optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects
the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor. When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see
page 87), the video signals input at the VIDEO and S
VIDEO jacks are converted and output at the VIDEO, S
VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
interchangeably.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Note
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y PB PR
PB
Y
P
R
S
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
Note
18
CONNECTIONS
■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC)
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
When video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as
follows where the video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks have the top priority:
COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO
Audio and video signal flow
Note
Note
DIGITAL AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
AUDIO
RLRL
Digital output
Output
AUDIO OUT (REC)
Input
Analog output
Digital audio
Analog audio
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y P
B
P
R
Y P
B
P
R
Through
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 87)
Analog video
19
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Connecting a TV
CAUTION
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRPBY
PRPB
V
S
Y
TV
S-video in
Component video in
Video in
20
CONNECTIONS
Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those
made for your TV (see page 19). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 87), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV
(see page 19). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other
components to the VIDEO jacks.
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 87), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When
recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”
(see page 85).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is
given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
■ Connecting a DVD player
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB
Notes
CAUTION
AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
DVD
VIDEO
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
PRPBY
S
V
O
L
R
C
DVD player
Optical audio out
Coaxial audio out
Video out
Audio out
S-video out
Component video out
21
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
■ Connecting a DVD recorder
■ Connecting a VCR
VIDEO
IN
DVR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
DVR
V
S
V
LR LR
PRPBY
S
DVD recorder
Audio in
Audio out
Video out
Video in
Component video out
S-video out
S-video in
VIDEO
IN
VCR
OUT
V
S
V
LR LR
S
VCR
Audio in
Audio out
Video out
Video in
S-video out
S-video in
22
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting an STB
DIGITAL
INPUT
DTV/CBL
VIDEO
DTV/
CBL
OPTICAL
DTV/
CBL
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
O
LR
V
S
P
RPBY
Cable TV receiver or
satellite receiver
Optical audio out
Component video out
Video out
Audio out
S-video out
23
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”
(see page 85).
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-
output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.
Connecting a CD player, an MD player, a tape deck or a turntable
Notes
CAUTION
AUDIO AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
CD
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/
CD-R
CD
DIGITAL OUTPUT
OPTICAL
PHONO
GND
LR
L
C
R
LR LR
O
O
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
Coaxial audio out
Audio out
Audio in Audio out
Optical audio out
Optical audio in
Turntable
Audio outGND
24
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the
supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK
terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the
YAMAHA iPod universal dock.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
• Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of
this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the
front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 108.
• Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on.
• Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such
as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod.
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
Notes
CAUTION
DOCK
YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10 sold separately)
iPod
25
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output
or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
• Set the volume level of the external amplifiers connected to the PRE OUT jacks to the maximum.
• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see
page 39).
• If SPEAKERS A is turned off (see page 38) and “SP B” is set to “ZONE B” (see page 89), signals are output only at the FRONT PRE
OUT jacks.
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level with the
supplied remote control (see page 42).
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 79)
and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81).
• To use the external amplifiers in Zone 2, select “EXT” in “ZONE2 AMP” (see page 89). For details. see “Using the external amplifier”
on page 98.
Connecting an external amplifier
Notes
CAUTION
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
PRE OUT
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
LRLRLR
Front channel
amplifier
Center channel
amplifier
Surround inFront in
Surround channel
amplifier
Surround back channel
amplifier
Subwoofer
Surround back in
Center in Subwoofer in
26
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external
decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround
channels.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 44), this unit automatically
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• When headphones are used, signals are output only from the front left and right channels.
For 6-channel input For 8-channel input
Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
Notes
CAUTION
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUT
LR
L R
Multi-format player or
external decoder
Front out
Surround out
Subwoofer out
Center out
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUT
LR
L R L R
Multi-format player or
external decoder
Front out
Surround out
Subwoofer out
Center out
Surround back out
27
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit.
Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and other components before making connections.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player
Note
CAUTION
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
ON/OFF
VIDEOS VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
O
V
S
L
R
Game console or
video camera
Audio out L/R
Video out
S-video out
Optical audio out
28
CONNECTIONS
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
• Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General
models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area
(see page 91).
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna.
2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT
terminal.
3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT terminal.
4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back
into place.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the
other lead wire to the GND terminal.
y
Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to
this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception
when you tune into AM stations (see page 52).
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Notes
75Ω UNBAL.
FM
ANT
AM
ANT
GND
TUNER
Indoor FM antenna
(supplied except for U.K. model)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the
antenna
GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
AM loop antenna
(supplied except for U.K. model)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m of vinyl-covered
wire extended outdoors from a
window.
29
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of
this unit must be set for your local voltage
BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE
SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and
create a potential fire hazard.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or
counterclockwise to the correct position using a
straight slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet
Korea model ...............................................................None
Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on.
However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main
zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when MASTER ON/
OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to
the OFF position. For information on the maximum power
or the total power consumption of the components that can
be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS”
on page 114.
Connecting the power cable
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
To the AC wall outlet
(U.S.A. model)
CAUTION
230-
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Voltage indication
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
30
CONNECTIONS
If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set “SP
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this
unit.
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
See page 31 for details about turning on or off this
unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “SP IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
Setting the speaker impedance
CAUTION
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
32,4
2,5
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
ON OFF
While holding
down
PROGRAM
SP IMP.-8 MIN
Note
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
SP IMP.-6 MIN
MASTER
ON OFF
31
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.
■ Turning on this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward
to the ON position to turn on this unit.
• Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or
STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main
zone to the standby mode.
• Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or
POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main
zone.
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as
POWER and STANDBY on the remote control are
operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward
to the ON position.
■ Turning off this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again
to release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
Turning on and off the power
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
ON/OFF
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
VCR
PHONO
MASTER ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
STANDBY
POWER
Note
MASTER
ON OFF
Front panel
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
STANDBY
Front panel Remote control
or
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
POWER
Front panel
or
Remote control
MASTER
ON OFF
Front panel
AUTO SETUP
32
This unit employs the YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer
microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment.
YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your
system.
Speaker wiring WIRING
Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker.
Speaker distance DISTANCE
Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel.
Speaker size SIZE
Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel.
Parametric equalizer EQ
Adjusts the frequency and the parametric equalizer level of each channel to reduce coloration across the channels and
create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands of sizes of speakers for some
channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. In addition, the frequency response of each channel is adjusted
in accordance with the sound output from your front speakers.
Volume level LEVEL
Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• If the “AUTO SETUP” procedure stops and an error or warning message appears on your video monitor, see the “AUTO SETUP”
section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 109 for appropriate remedies.
• After you have completed the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel and place it in a suitable
location in your listening room.
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are
seated in your listening position.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
2 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
AUTO SETUP
Notes
Connecting the optimizer microphone
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
OPTIMIZER MIC
Optimizer microphone
33
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
English
Once you have connected the supplied optimizer
microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel and have placed it in a suitable location in your
listening room, run “AUTO SETUP” in the OSD or in the
front panel display.
To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
y
• You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that
appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual
uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure and an
error or warning message appears in the OSD or in the front
panel display, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on pages 109 and 110 for a complete
list of error and warning messages and proper remedies.
• The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold.
• If the volume level and the crossover frequency of your
subwoofer can be adjusted, set the volume level to about half
way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU to enter “SET
MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press u / d to select “AUTO SETUP”.
3 Press ENTER to enter “AUTO SETUP”.
The “AUTO:MENU” display appears in the OSD.
Using AUTO SETUP
Note
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-A UX DV R
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VCR
PHONO
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ON SCREEN
1
2-10
1,11
MENU
SET MENU
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
AMP
SOURCE
TV
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
1
AUTO:MENU
.SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
START
Automatic
processing
of all items
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
34
AUTO SETUP
4 Press u / d to select “SETUP” and then
press j / i to select the desired setting.
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO
SETUP” settings and override the previous
settings.
• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”
settings and restore the previous settings.
• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”
parameters to the initial factory settings.
“RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have
previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.
5 Press d to select “START” and then press
ENTER to start the setup procedure.
Loud test tones are output from each speaker and
“WAITING” appears in the OSD during the
“AUTO:CHECK” procedure. Once all items are set,
the “RESULT:EXIT” display appears in the OSD.
The display changes as follows.
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as
follows:
Number of speakers SP
Displays the number of speakers connected to this
unit in the following order:
Front/Back/Subwoofer
Speaker distance DIST
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position in the following order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
Speaker level LVL
Displays the speaker output level in the following
order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output
level
Note
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
1
AUTO:MENU
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
.START
Automatic
processing
of all items
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
RESULT:EXIT
. WARNING (3)
RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
>SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
1
AUTO:CHECK
INITIALIZING
.WIRING
SIZE/DISTANCE
EQUALIZING
LEVEL
CHECK CH=CENTER
|||||;;;;;;;;
[]: Exit
p
35
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
English
• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing
procedure, restart from step 4.
• If you selected “RELOAD”, “UNDO” or “DEFAULT” in
step 4, no test tones are output.
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure,
the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen
appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on
page 37.
• The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the
number of warning messages. For details, see “If a
warning screen appears” on page 37.
• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR
PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK”
procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND
MENU” (see page 81) is automatically set to
“REVERSE”.
6 Press d to select “RESULT” and then press
ENTER to display the setup results in detail.
7 Press j / i repeatedly to toggle between the
setup result displays.
Notes
RESULT:EXIT
WARNING (3)
. RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
>SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
RESULT:WIRING
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
RESULT:WIRING
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
FRONT L;;;4.50m
CENTER;;;;5.20m
FRONT R;;;4.80m
PRNS L;;;;5.20m
PRNS R;;;;5.30m
RESULT:DISTANCE1
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
FRONT L;;;;;;LRG
RESULT:SIZE
CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB
2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB
3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB
4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB
5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB
6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB
7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB
RESULT:EQ
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
FRONT L;;;+1.0dB
CENTER;;;;-1.5dB
FRONT R;;;+6.5dB
PRNS L;;;;-9.0dB
PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB
RESULT:LEVEL1
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
Results of the speaker
connection and wiring
Results of the speaker
distance from the
listening position
Results of the frequency
response of each speaker
Results of the parametric
equalizer of each speaker
Results of the speaker
output level
36
AUTO SETUP
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 76).
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of
your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to
recalibrate your system.
• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may
be longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your subwoofer.
• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the
same band to provide finer adjustments.
8 Press ENTER to return to the top
“RESULT:EXIT” display.
9 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”
and “CANCEL” and then press j / i to select
“SET” or “CANCEL”.
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
10 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
11 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
Notes
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
RESULT:EXIT
WARNING (3)
RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
RESULT:EXIT
WARNING (3)
RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
MENU
SET MENU
37
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
English
■ If an error screen appears
Press u / d / j / i to select “RETRY” or “EXIT”
and then press ENTER.
The following display is an example where “E-9:USER
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.
Choices: RETRY, EXIT
• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
■ If a warning screen appears
Warning messages inform you of potential problems
detected during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at
“WARNING” and then press ENTER to
display the detailed information about the
warning.
y
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the
number of warning messages.
2 Press j / i repeatedly to toggle between the
warning displays.
y
• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO
SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on
page 109.
• When the corresponding warning message is not
applicable to a speaker, “–
–” is displayed instead.
3 Press ENTER to return to the top
“RESULT:EXIT” display.
ERROR
E-9:USER CANCEL
. Don't operate
any function.
. >RETRY EXIT
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
Note
RESULT:EXIT
. WARNING (3)
RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
>SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
RESULT:EXIT
. WARNING (3)
RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
>SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
RESULT:EXIT
WARNING (3)
RESULT
. SP : 5/4/0.1
. DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m
. LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
PLAYBACK
38
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the
remote control repeatedly).
Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the
respective speakers are turned on or off.
3 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for
a few seconds.
If you are to select an input source connected via digital
connections, set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”
(see page 41).
4 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
See page 52 for details about tuning instructions.
PLAYBACK
CAUTION
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
66,7 32 5
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
VCR
PHONO
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDI O
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ON SCREEN
7
5
2
3
2
SPEAKERS
BA
SPEAKERS
9
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Front panel
Remote control
or
Note
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
VCR
PHONO
INPUT
Front panel Remote control
or
VCR DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
DVD AUTO
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
input mode
Available input sources
39
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
English
5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
6 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS”
and then rotate the PROGRAM selector to
adjust the corresponding frequency
response level.
• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency
response.
• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency
response.
• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored
independently.
• When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 84),
and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output
automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this
unit.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front left
and right speakers.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the Pure Direct
mode (see page 45) is selected or when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as
the input source (see page 44).
• To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, see page 48
for details.
7 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel (or press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote
control repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and in the OSD.
See page 64 for details about sound field programs.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source (see page 44).
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS
96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound
field programs are applied.
• To display information about the currently selected input
source in the OSD, see page 46 for details.
Notes
VOLUME
VOLUME
or
Remote control
Front panel
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
VCR DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
TREBLE 0dB
Notes
PROGRAM
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ENHANCER
Front panel
or
Remote control
VCR DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
TV Sports
Currently selected
surround field program
USING AUDIO FEATURES
40
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 64). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 44).
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see
page 45) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 45) is selected, or
when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 45).
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the
audio output.
y
• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME
+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE”
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 84).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
If you change the input source or the sound field program while
the audio output is being muted, this unit resumes the audio
output.
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on
the type of material you are playing.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press NIGHT on the remote control
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the
effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front
panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Using SILENT CINEMA
Notes
Muting the audio output
Note
MUTE
Selecting the night listening mode
NIGHT
10
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
41
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
English
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following
cases:
– when the Pure Direct mode (see page 45) is selected.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 44).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness
depending on the input source and surround sound settings
you use.
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
y
• We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most
cases.
• You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the
“INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 86).
• To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”.
• DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on
the player even if you make a digital connection between this
unit and the player.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
to select the desired input source.
2 Press INPUT MODE on the front panel
repeatedly to select the desired input mode.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit
automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal is detected.
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 29).
1 Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the desired input
source.
2 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
See page 52 for details about tuning instructions.
Notes
Selecting the input mode
Notes
INPUT
INPUT MODE
VCR DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
DVD AUTO
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
input mode
Available input sources
Note
Using the sleep timer
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
VCR
PHONO
42
USING AUDIO FEATURES
3 Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front
panel display, and the display returns to the selected
sound field program.
4 To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on
the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP
OFF” appears in the front panel display.
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/
OFF on the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby
mode.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
“AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see
page 82).
y
This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on
the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to
select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust
and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output
level.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press LEVEL on the remote control
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
SLEEP
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
VCR DVR DVD
p
CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
LR
SLEEP 120min
Flashes
VCR DVR DVD
p
CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
LR
STRAIGHT
Lights up
SLEEP
VCR DVR DVD
p
CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
SLEEP OFF
Adjusting the speaker level
Note
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDI O
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ON SCREEN
2
3
1
1
AMP
SOURCE
TV
TITLE
LEVEL
BAND
43
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
English
• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker
output level.
• Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker
output level.
• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker
output level.
• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right
speaker output level.
• Select “SUR. B. R” to adjust the surround back
right speaker output level.
• Select “SUR. B. L” to adjust the surround back left
speaker output level.
• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker
output level.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output
level.
• Select “PRES. R” to adjust the presence right
speaker output level.
• Select “PRES. L” to adjust the presence left
speaker output level.
y
• Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can
also select the speaker by pressing u / d.
• Instead of “SUR. B. R” and “SUR. B. L”, “SUR. B” is
displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or
“LRGx1” (see page 80).
2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the
speaker output level.
• Press i to increase the value.
• Press j to decrease the value.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
3 Press ENTER on the remote control when
you have completed your adjustment.
Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are
created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is
resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that
are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The
Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances
your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened
complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as
well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass
is compensated, providing the improved performance of
the overall sound system.
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the
PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog 2-
channel input sources.
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with
any of the sound field programs.
• When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while
an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not
Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD.
• When the input source is changed to an incompatible input
source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned
on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically
turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in
2-channel or 7-channel stereo.
y
The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display
when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected.
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
Notes
44
USING AUDIO FEATURES
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press ENHANCER on the remote
control repeatedly to select the desired
Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
The following display is shown in the OSD and the
ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
Choices: 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo, Off
• Select “2ch Stereo” to play back compression
artifacts in 2-channel stereo.
• Select “7ch Stereo” to play back compression
artifacts in 7.1-channel stereo.
• Select “Off
” to turn off the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode.
When you select “Off ”, this unit returns to the previously
selected sound field program.
2 Press j / i on the remote control to select the
desired effect level.
Choices: HIGH, LOW
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the
characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set
the effect level to “LOW”.
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 26) as the input
source.
Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that
“MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel
display.
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,
no other source can be played. To select another input source with
the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector
buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the
front panel display.
Note
Note
ENHANCER
0
MUSIC ENHANCER
2ch Stereo
. LOW >HIGH
ENHANCER
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Lights up
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
MULTI CH INPUT
45
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press STEREO on the remote control
repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 81).
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press STRAIGHT on the remote
control to select “STRAIGHT”.
2 To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press
STRAIGHT on the remote control again so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front
panel display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
y
You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing
STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel.
The Pure Direct mode turns off the video circuitry and the
front panel display, allowing sources to bypass the
decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you can
enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and analog
sources.
Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel (or set
the component selector switch to AMP and then
press PURE DIRECT on the remote control) to
turn on or off the Pure Direct mode.
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS
when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 41),
no sound will be output.
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• The front panel display automatically dims.
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the Pure Direct mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the OSD
– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for speaker
level settings)
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this
unit is turned off.
y
• The indicator around the PURE DIRECT button on the front
panel lights up while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.
• The front panel display turns on momentarily when an
operation is performed.
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
STEREO
1
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2ch Stereo
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
ENT.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STRAIGHT
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PURE DIRECT
8
PURE DIRECT
Front panel
Remote control
or
USING VIDEO FEATURES
46
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU on the remote
control.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO”
and then press ENTER.
The following information about the input source
appears in the OSD.
Signal format FORMAT
Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to analog
input.
Display status: Analog, Digital, DolbyD, DTS, PCM,
---
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.
Sampling frequency SAMPLING
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
Display status: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz,
88.2kHz, 96kHz, ---
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling
frequency.
Channel CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround
channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
“---” appears when there is no source channel available.
Bit rate BITRATE
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.
Flag FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch
decoders.
3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again
to exit from “SET MENU”.
USING VIDEO FEATURES
Displaying the input source
information
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENU
SET MENU
;SIGNAL INFO
FORMAT PCM
SAMPLING 48kHz
CHANNEL 2/0/---
BITRATE 2/0/---
FLAG NONE
[RETURN]:Exit
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Note
Note
Note
Note
MENU
SET MENU
47
USING VIDEO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can display the operating information of this unit on a
video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound
field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is
much easier to see the available options and parameters
than it is to read the information in the front panel display.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press DISPLAY on the remote
control repeatedly to toggle between the
OSD modes.
The OSD mode changes in the following order.
Full display
Fully shows the sound field program parameter
settings as well as the contents of the front panel
display.
Short display
Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display
at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this
unit.
Display off
No information is displayed except for the “SET
MENU” screen.
y
You can display a gray background in the OSD when there
is not video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in
“OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 88).
• The OSD signal is not output at the DVR/VCR OUT jacks
and will not be recorded.
• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to
“ON” (see page 87) to display the OSD.
• To display the OSD with the component video signals
output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks, set the OSD mode to the full display mode.
• When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to
“OFF” (see page 88), the OSD may not be displayed
correctly depending on the conditions of the picture.
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source
(see page 44).
Selecting the OSD mode
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Full display
Short display
Display off
P02 MUSIC
. Pop/Rock
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;21ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;25ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
P02 MUSIC
Pop/Rock
Full display Short display
Notes
Playing video sources in the
background
Note
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
VCR
PHONO
Audio sources
Video sources
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
48
If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX
or DTS-ES decoders.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote
control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder
while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed.
Auto AUTO
When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is
input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back
the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present
in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in
6.1/7.1 channels.
Decoders
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the source you are playing.
Off OFF
Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels.
• “PLIIxMovie” is available only when “SUR. B L/R SP” (see
page 80) is set to “SMLx2” or “LRGx2”.
• Some 6.1/7.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag
that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing
these kinds of discs in 6.1/7.1 channels, select a decoder
manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press
EXTD SUR. in the following cases:
– when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 80) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see
page 80) is set to “NONE”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 45) or Pure Direct (see
page 45) mode is selected.
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to
“AUTO”.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 80).
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
surround
EXTD SUR.
7
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Decoder Functions
PLIIxMovie
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx
movie decoder.
PLIIxMusic
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic
IIx music decoder.
EX/ES
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder.
EX
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby
Digital EX decoder.
Notes
49
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press STANDARD on the remote
control repeatedly to switch between the
“SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED”
programs or press MOVIE to select the
“MOVIE THEATER” program.
2 Press SELECT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending
on the type of source you are playing and your
personal preference.
y
You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote
control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel
display.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 80).
Enjoying 2-channel sources in
surround
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STANDARD
5
MOVIE
4
or
SELECT
6
SUR. STANDARD Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
music sources
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
game sources
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
music sources
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
game sources
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources
SUR. ENHANCED
or
MOVIE THEATER
Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources
Note
50
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
If you set “SUR. L/R SP”
to “NONE” (see page 80),
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see
page 64).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 80) in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 44).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when the Pure Direct (see page 45) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see
page 45) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 45).
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP
Note
RECORDING
51
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in
noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs
(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 39), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 82) and the sound field programs (see
page 64) do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the source
component you want to record from.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
RECORDING
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
CAUTION
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
2
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
VCR
PHONO
1
2
INPUT
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
VCR
PHONO
or
Front panel Remote control
FM/AM TUNING
52
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
•Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
•Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
FM/AM TUNING
Note
Automatic tuning
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
3 312 4
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
or
AM
FM
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING MODE
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
AUTO TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 1440 kHz
Lights upNo colon (:)
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
AUTO TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 1530 kHz
l PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
Lights up
53
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue searching.
Manual tuning
Note
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
3 312 4
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
or
AM
FM
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING MODE
VCR DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 1440 kHz
No colon (:)
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
l PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
54
FM/AM TUNING
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower
frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning
options” on page 55.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after
searching for all the available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset
tuning” on page 55.
Automatic preset tuning
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
132
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
FM
Notes
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
AUTO TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
A1:FM 87.50MHz
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Flashes
Flash
55
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
■ Automatic preset tuning options
You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower
frequencies.
First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on
page 54.
• Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING l
/ h to select the preset station number under
which the first station will be stored.
Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all
been stored up to E8.
• Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:)
disappears from the front panel display and
then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning
toward lower frequencies.
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See pages 52 and 53 for tuning instructions.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel
display shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
Note
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
l PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
Manual preset tuning
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
43 2,5
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 630 kHz
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
C :AM 630 kHz
Preset station
group
Flashes
Colon (:)
56
FM/AM TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
• Press h to select a higher preset station number.
• Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other
stations.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the
component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER
to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel
(or A/B/C/D/E j / i on the remote control) to
select the desired preset station group
(A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
Notes
l PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
C3:AM 630 kHz
Preset station number
Flashes
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
C3:AM 630 kHz
The displayed station has been stored as C3.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Selecting preset stations
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
2
1
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ON SCREEN
2
1
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
or
Front panel
Remote control
57
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote
control) to select the desired preset station
number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 56.
2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
l PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
E1:FM 87.50MHz
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
or
Front panel
Remote control
Exchanging preset stations
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
2,4 1,3
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
E1:FM 87.50MHz
Flashes
Flashes
58
FM/AM TUNING
3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 56.
4 Press EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
A5:FM 90.60MHz
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING h
LEVEL
Flashes
Flashes
VCR DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
EDIT E1-A5
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)
59
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Radio Data System (U.K. and Europe models only) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries.
The Radio Data System function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various Radio Data
System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced
other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.
Use this feature to select one of the 15 Radio Data System
program types and search for all the available preset
stations of the selected program type.
1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
2 Press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote
control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK
mode.
The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in
the front panel display.
y
To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE
on the remote control again.
3 Press PRESET/CH u / d on the remote
control to select the desired program type.
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
(U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)
Selecting the Radio Data System
program
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
PHONO
VCR
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
ON SCREEN
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
9010
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT
EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK
1
2
3
4
TUNER
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
NEWS
Flashes
Program type Descriptions
NEWS
News
AFFAIRS
Current affairs
INFO
General information
SPORT
Sports
EDUCATE
Education
DRAMA
Drama
CULTURE
Culture
SCIENCE
Science
VARIED
Light entertainment
POP M
Popular music
ROCK M
Rock music
M.O.R. M
Middle-of-the-road music (easy-
listening)
LIGHT M
Light classics
CLASSICS
Serious classics
OTHER M
Other music
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
POP M
Lights up
60
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)
4 Press PTY SEEK START on the remote
control to start searching for all the available
Radio Data System preset stations.
The name of the selected program type flashes and
the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel
display while this unit is searching for stations.
y
To stop searching for stations, press PTY SEEK START on
the remote control again.
• This unit stops searching for stations when a station
broadcasting the selected program type is found.
• If the station found is not the one you desire, press PTY
SEEK START again to resume searching for another
station broadcasting the same program type.
Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other
networks) data service of the Radio Data System station
network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this
unit automatically searches for all the available preset
stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data
service of the selected program type for a certain duration
of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this
unit automatically switches to the local station
broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back
to the national station once the EON data service ends.
• You can use this feature only when the EON data service is
available.
• The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only
when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data
System station.
1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel
display, select another Radio Data System program so
that the EON indicator lights up.
Notes
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
POP M
PTY HOLD
Flashes Lights up
Using the Radio Data System
station network
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
PHONO
VCR
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
ON SCREEN
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
9010
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT
EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK
1
3
TUNER
61
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)
BASIC
OPERATION
English
3 Press EON on the remote control repeatedly
to select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or
SPORT).
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
y
To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control
repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears
and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display.
Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data
System information: PS (program service), PTY (program
type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The
corresponding indicators light up in the front panel
display.
• You can select one of the Radio Data System modes only when
the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the
front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive
all of the Radio Data System data from the station.
• You can select only the available Radio Data System modes
being offered by the station.
• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit
may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In
particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and
may not be available even when the other Radio Data System
modes are available.
• In case of poor reception conditions, press TUNING MODE
(AUTO/MAN’L) on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while
this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception
may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front
panel display.
• When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the
program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters
are displayed with the “_” (underscore).
• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
EON
NEWS
Lights up
Displaying the Radio Data System
information
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
PHONO
VCR
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
ON SCREEN
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
9010
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT
EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK
1
2
TUNER
62
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)
2 Press FREQ/TEXT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data
System display mode.
• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “RT” to display the information on the
Radio Data System program currently being
received.
• Select “CT” to display the current time.
FREQ/TEXT
CTRTPTYPS
Frequency display
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
63
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and
shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous
that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct
sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and
shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound
fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be
able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a
dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA
has done with the digital sound field processor.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 44).
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs
are applied.
■ Front panel operations
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
■ Remote control operations
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press one of the sound field program
selector buttons on the remote control
repeatedly.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
PROGRAM selector
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET/CH
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
AMP
Sound field program
selector buttons
64
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE”
to “AUTO” (see page 41) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
• The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken
in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming
from the front, back, left and right.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.
■ For movie/video sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
y
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 63).
Sound field program descriptions
Notes
Remote
control
button
Sound field program Features Sources
1
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel
sources as they are.
MULTI
2-CH
2
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. Creates an enthusiastic atmosphere where you can
feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert.
3
ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces the sound environment of a large concert
hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of watching
various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports
programs.
ENTERTAINMENT
Mono Movie
CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces monaural video sources (such as old
movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth using only the
presence sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT
Game
CINEMA DSP processing. Adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game
sounds.
65
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
■ For music sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
y
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 63).
4
MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound
field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions.
MULTI
2-CH
MOVIE THEATER
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in
the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and
expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films
encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field
employing the most advanced techniques.
MOVIE THEATER
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the
newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of
the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are
restrained as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and
multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field.
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
Remote
control
button
Sound field program Features Sources
Remote
control
button
Sound field program Features Sources
1
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Plays back 2-channel sources.
2-CH
STEREO
7ch Stereo
Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 7.1 channels, providing a
larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc.
2
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. The program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert
hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound.
MULTI
2-CH
MUSIC
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom
Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated.
MUSIC
The Roxy Thtr
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music
environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A.The
listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall.
3
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a
lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and
energetic sound.
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
66
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to
initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a
sound field program group (see page 88).
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the
sound field parameter name in the OSD.
• You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”
(see page 88). If you want to change the sound field parameter
values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 67.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field
program parameter settings.
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.
In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages.
• If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter
value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the
front panel display.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP.
2 Turn on the video monitor and then press
DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display is shown in the OSD.
3 Press one of the sound field program
selector buttons repeatedly to select the
desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field
parameter and then j / i to change the
selected sound field parameter value.
•Press i to increase the value.
•Press j to decrease the value.
Changing sound field parameter
settings
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
VCR
PHONO
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ON SCREEN
2
4
1
3
AMP
SOURCE
TV
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
P02 MUSIC
. Pop/Rock
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;21ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;25ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
Sound field program category
Sound field parameters Sound field parameter
values
Cursor
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
67
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
y
To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 66 for details.
Sound field parameter Features
DSP LEVEL
DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on
the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level
relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
INIT.DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INI.DLY
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance
from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The
larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set
to a large value.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
68
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB ROOM SIZE
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Sound field parameter Features
Level
Level
Level
Time Time Time
Source sound
Early
reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound source
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0 Large value = 10
69
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
REV.TIME
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
REV.DELAY
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Sound field parameter Features
Reverberation
Reverberation
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
Source sound
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early reflections
Source sound
Level
REV. LEVEL
Time
70
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
REV.LEVEL
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
DIALG.LIFT
Dialog lift. Adjust the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the
front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher
the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2ch Stereo
DIRECT
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
• The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and
“TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 39).
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the
subwoofer in the following cases:
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 81).
– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 79) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”
(see page 81).
7ch Stereo
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
PL LEVEL
PR LEVEL
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence
right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Sound field parameter Features
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
Time
71
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
y
The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR.
STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to
select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 49).
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
PANORAMA
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround
speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
DIMENSION
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards
the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
CENTER WIDTH
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output
completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value
moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music
C.IMAGE
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the
center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
Sound field parameter Features
72
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table
below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program.
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back.
Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as
special sound effects, etc.
y
Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speakers
(see page 48).
The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows:
*1
When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are turned off in the front panel display
*2
When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and “PRIORITY” is set to “PRch” (see page 81)
*3
When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and “PRIORITY” is set to “SBch” (see page 81)
Sound field program speaker layouts
Note
Front left speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker
Center speaker Surround right speaker Presence left speaker
Front right speaker Surround back left speaker Presence right speaker
Speaker from which sound is being output Speaker from which no sound is being output
Sound field program
2-channel
audio
(monaural)
2-channel
audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
1
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
2
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
3
STEREO
2ch Stereo
STEREO
7ch Stereo
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
The Bttm Line
The Roxy Thtr
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
L
SL
SBR
C SR
PL
R
SBL
PR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
73
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
Mono Movie
Game
MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
General
SUR. STANDARD
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DTS
Pro Logic Pro Logic
SUR. STANDARD
PLII Movie
PLII Music
PLII Game
PLIIx Movie
PLIIx Music
PLIIx Game
Movie/Game Pro Logic II
Music Pro Logic IIx
SUR. STANDARD
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Cinema Cinema/Music
Music
Sound field program
2-channel
audio
(monaural)
2-channel
audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
1
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
2
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
3
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
74
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SUR. ENHANCED
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DTS
Pro Logic Pro Logic
SUR. ENHANCED
PLII Movie
PLIIx Movie
When
“PRIORITY” is set
to “PRch”
When
“PRIORITY” is set
to “SBch”
SUR. ENHANCED
Neo:6 Cinema
When
“PRIORITY” is set
to “PRch”
When
“PRIORITY” is set
to “SBch”
STRAIGHT
Monaural playback
Sound field program
2-channel
audio
(monaural)
2-channel
audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
1
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
2
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
3
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
75
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
Pure Direct
Monaural playback
Sound field program
2-channel
audio
(monaural)
2-channel
audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
1
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
2
5.1/6.1/7.1-
channel audio
*
3
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
SET MENU
76
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 32).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
SET MENU
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
crossover frequency.
79
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
82
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
82
D)EQUALIZER
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
83
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
84
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
84
G)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.
84
Parameter Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
85
B)INPUT MODE
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
86
C)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source.
86
D)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
87
77
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Option menu 3 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 46).
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.
87
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.
88
C)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
88
D)MULTI ZONE SET
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals or selects how
the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.
89
78
SET MENU
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
• If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons
during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU”
operation is canceled.
• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each
parameter setting.
• Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level.
You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night
listening mode (see page 40).
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU to enter “SET
MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
3 Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
4 Press u / d repeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired menu.
The following displays are examples where “SOUND
MENU” is selected.
Using SET MENU
Note
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-A UX DV R
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VCR
PHONO
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ON SCREEN
1
2-6
1,7
MENU
SET MENU
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
AMP
SOURCE
TV
SET MENU
;AUTOSETUP
.;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;MANUAL SETUP
.1SOUNDMENU
2INPUTMENU
3OPTIONMENU
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)EQUALIZER
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
p
p
.E)LFE LEVEL
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 2/2
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
79
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
The following display is an example where
“SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected.
6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter
and then j / i to change the parameter
settings.
• Press i to increase the value.
• Press j to decrease the value.
7 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
• Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front
speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left
and right channels are directed to the speakers selected
in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81).
• Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front
speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. All the front left and right channel signals
are directed to the front left and right speakers.
If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 81), the LFE
signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency
signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency
signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to
“NONE” are all directed to the front left and right speakers
regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
.FL;;;;;;;;;;
FR;;;;;;;;;;
C;;;;;;;;;;
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
-__________+
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
MENU
SET MENU
1 SOUND MENU
Note
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)EQUALIZER
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
p
p
.E)LFE LEVEL
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 2/2
p
p
SMALL>LARGE
FRONT SP
80
SET MENU
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/
BASS OUT”, and the rest of the center channel signals
are directed to the front left and right speakers.
• Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center
speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/
BASS OUT”.
• Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker
that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All
the center channel signals are directed to the center
speaker.
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 50) and “SUR. B L/R SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”. The low-frequency
signals of the surround left and right channels are
directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left
and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround left and right channels are directed to the
speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left
and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
Surround back speakers SUR. B L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround
back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the
surround back channel are directed to the speakers
selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the
surround back channel signals are directed to the
surround left and right speakers.
• Select “SMLx1” (small x 1) if you have a small
surround back speaker that does not reproduce low-
frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency
signals of the surround back left and right channels are
directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”
and the rest of the signals are directed to the surround
back left speaker.
• Select “SMLx2” (small x 2) if you have two small
surround back speakers that do not reproduce low-
frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency
signals of the surround back left and right channels are
directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “LRGx1” (large x 1) if you have a large
surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround back left and right
channel signals are directed to the surround back left
speaker.
• Select “LRGx2” (large x 2) if you have two large
surround back speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround back left and right
channel signals are directed to the surround back left
and right speakers.
Presence speakers PRESENCE SP
Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers
connected to this unit.
Choices: NONE, YES
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect presence
speakers.
• Select “YES” (yes) if you connected presence speakers
and want to use them.
NONE>SMLLRG
CENTER SP
NONE>SMLLRG
SUR. L/R SP
SMLx1 >SMLx2
SUR. B L/R SP
>NONEYES
PRESENCE SP
81
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
• Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a
subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) or to “NONE” are directed to the
subwoofer.
• Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a
subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels, and the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) or to “NONE” are all directed to the front
left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP”
setting (see page 79).
• Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.
The low-frequency signals of any source are output
from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”
(or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are directed to the
subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left
and right channels are directed to the front left and
right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting (see page 79).
Crossover CROSS OVER
Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 79 and 80). All frequencies
below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer
or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 79 and 80).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
Presence/Surround back channel priority
PRIORITY
Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the
surround back speakers when playing sources that contain
surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP
sound field programs.
Choices: PRch, SBch
• Select “PRch” to use the presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from the
surround speakers.
• Select “SBch” to use the surround back speakers when
a surround back channel signals is detected in a
CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals
are output from the front speakers.
SWFRFRNT>BOTH
LFE/BASS OUT
FREQ;;;80Hz
CROSS OVER
>NORMALREVERSE
02ASUBWOOFER PHASE
PRch >SBch
PRIORITY
82
SET MENU
■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 79).
Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
• Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left
speaker.
• Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right
speaker.
• Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker.
• Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left
speaker.
• Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right
speaker.
• Select “SBL” to adjust the balance of the surround
back left speaker.
• Select “SBR” to adjust the balance of the surround
back right speaker.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.
• Select “PL” to adjust the balance of the presence left
speaker.
• Select “PR” to adjust the balance of the presence right
speaker.
• “C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SBL”, “SBR”, “SWFR”, “PL” and “PR”
cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 80), “SUR. L/R
SP” (see page 80), “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 80), “LFE/
BASS OUT” (see page 81) and “PRESENCE SP” (see page 80)
are set to “NONE” respectively.
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R
SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 80).
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center
speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “SB L” to adjust the distance of the surround
back left speaker.
Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• Select “SB R” to adjust the distance of the surround
back right speaker.
Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “PRNS L” to adjust the distance of the presence
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “PRNS R” to adjust the distance of the presence
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Notes
.FL;;;;;;;;;;
FR;;;;;;;;;;
C;;;;;;;;;;
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
-__________+
. UNIT;;;;;;meters
FRONTL;;;;3.00m
FRONTR;;;;3.00m
CENTER;;;;;3.00m
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
C)SP
DISTANCE
p
p
83
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
• “CENTER”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”,
“PRNS L” and “PRNS R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP”
(see page 80), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 80), “SUR. B L/R SP”
(see page 80), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81) and
“PRESENCE SP” (see page 80) are set to “NONE”
respectively.
• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR. B” is displayed if “SUR.
B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 80).
■ Center graphic equalizer D)EQUALIZER
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the
graphic equalizer.
Equalizer select EQ TYPE SELECT
Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.
Choices: AUTO PEQ, CENTER GEQ, EQ OFF
• Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer
adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32).
• Select “CENTER GEQ” to adjust the built-in 5-
frequency band graphic equalizer for the center speaker
so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches
that of the front left and right speakers.
• Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature.
• “AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected when you run “AUTO
SETUP” (see page 32).
• If you press u / d while “CENTER GEQ” is selected, the
OSD changes to the following screen.
Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ
When you select “CENTER GEQ” in “EQ TYPE
SELECT”, use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-
frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz)
graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal
quality of the center speaker matches that of the front left
and right speakers. You can make adjustments while
listening to the currently selected source component or a
test tone.
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
y
Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the
selected frequency band.
Test tone TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments of “CENTER GEQ”
while listening to a test tone.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
• Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
Notes
Notes
.
EQ TYPE SELECT
CENTER GEQ
D)EQUALIZER
/ : CT GEQ
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
.TEST>OFFON
100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
D)EQUALIZER
-______+
p
p
84
SET MENU
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Speaker SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
jack.
■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Speaker SP
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Headphone HP
Adjusts the headphone compression.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Muting type MUTING TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 40).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay AUDIO DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Tone bypass TONE BYPASS
Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses
tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are
set to 0 dB (see page 39).
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry.
Note
.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
E)LFE
LEVEL
p
p
.SP:MINSTD>MAX
HP:MINSTD>MAX
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
p
p
.MUTING TYPE;FULL
AUDIO DELAY;;0ms
TONE BYPASS;AUTO
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
G)AUDIO SET
p
p
85
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the
input mode or rename the input source.
■ Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C
CMPNT-V INPUT [A]
CMPNT-V INPUT [B]
CMPNT-V INPUT [C]
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR
[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1)
Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, VCR, DVR
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4
OPTICAL IN (2)
OPTICAL IN (3)
OPTICAL IN (4)
Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
VCR, DVR
(3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
VCR, DVR
(4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
VCR, DVR
For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6
COAXIAL IN (5)
COAXIAL IN (6)
Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, VCR, DVR
(6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, VCR, DVR
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
2 INPUT MENU
.A)I/OASSIGNMENT
B)INPUTMODE
C)INPUTRENAME
D)VOLUME TRIM
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
2
INPUT
MENU
p
p
.[A];;;;;DVD
(DVD)
[B];;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL)
[C];;;;; DVR
( DVR )
CMPNT-V
INPUT
.(1);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R )
OPTICAL
OUT
Notes
.(2);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R)
(3);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(4);;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL )
OPTICAL
IN
.(5);;;;; CD
(CD)
(6);;;;; DVD
( DVD )
COAXIAL
IN
86
SET MENU
■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE
Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE”
back to “AUTO” (see page 41) regardless of the previous
setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”
or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on
this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to
“AUTO” (see page 41) regardless of the previous
setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit
automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall
the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS” or “ANALOG”)
used for that source whenever you turn on this unit.
■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the input source
you want to change the name of.
2 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press j / i on the remote control to
place the “_” (underscore) under the space
or the character you want to edit.
3 Press u / d to select the character you want
to use and then press j / i to move to the
next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press d to change the character in the following order, or
press u to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,
*, –, +, etc.)
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press SET MENU on the remote control to
exit from “INPUT RENAME”.
>AUTOLAST
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
B)INPUT
MODE
DVD-> DVD
[<]/[>]:Position
[]/[]:Chara.
C)INPUT
RENAME
________
p
p
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
VCR
PHONO
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
MENU
SET MENU
87
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Volume Trim D)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD,
DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: –
4 to 0
Control step: 1
• Press j to make the front panel display dimmer.
• Press i to make the front panel display brighter.
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals
interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video
signals to component video signals.
• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.
DVD->0.0dB
[<]/[>]:Adjust
[RETURN]:Exit
D)VOLUME TRIM
3 OPTION MENU
Notes
.A)DISPLAYSET
B)MEMORYGUARD
C)PARAM.INI
D)MULTI ZONESET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
3
OPTION
MENU
p
p
.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
VIDEOCONV.;;;ON
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
GRAY BACK;;;AUTO
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
A)DISPLAY
SET
p
p
88
SET MENU
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
• Press j to raise the position of the OSD.
• Press i to lower the position of the OSD.
Gray back GRAY BACK
Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD
when there is no video signal being input.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the
OSD when there is no video signal being input.
• Select “OFF” not to display any background in the
OSD.
• Depending on the video signals being input or the system
setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be
displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to
“OFF”.
• Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not
be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the
picture.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”
feature.
• Select “ON” to protect:
– DSP program parameters
– all “SET MENU” items
– all speaker levels
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.
■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
factory settings.
Press the corresponding sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control to select the sound
field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field
program names that have been changed from their initial
factory settings.
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 88).
Notes
Note
>OFFON
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
B)MEMORY
GUARD
Notes
STEREO
*MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
*STANDARD
Press DSP key
C)PARAM.
INI
89
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET
Use this feature to specify the location of speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit.
Speaker B setting SP B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main zone.
• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at
the SPEAKERS B terminals only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B
terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”.
• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”,
this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
(see page 50).
Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP
Use this feature to select either the external or the internal
amplifier to amplify the Zone 2 speakers.
Choices: INT, EXT
• Select “INT” (internal amplifier) to use the internal
amplifier of this unit if you connected your Zone 2
speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker
terminals of this unit.
• Select “EXT” (external amplifier) if you do not use the
Zone 2 speakers or if you connected your Zone 2
speakers to the external amplifier in Zone 2 connected
to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks of this unit.
Notes
.SPB;;;;;;;FRONT
ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
D)MULTI ZONE
SET
SPB;;;;;;;FRONT
. ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
D)MULTI ZONE
SET
ADVANCED SETUP
90
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see
page 31).
• Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the parameter you want to
adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
See page 91 for a complete list of available
parameters.
4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to change the selected
parameter setting.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on
this unit.
ADVANCED SETUP
Notes
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
1-2,5 2,4 3
MASTER
ON OFF
MASTER
ON OFF
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
While holding
down
PROGRAM
SP IMP.-8 MIN
Currently selected
parameter setting
Currently selected
parameter
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
ON OFF
91
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN
• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
*
The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems
(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”.
■ Factory presets PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 103).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 95).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “00001”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “00002”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library
code for the remote control (see page 95).
■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition (see page 95).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “81916”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “81917”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library
code for the remote control (see page 95).
■ Tuner frequency step TU
(Asia and General models only)
Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
8ΩMIN
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 Ω or
higher.
*
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
6ΩMIN
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
Notes
Note
Note
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
92
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 94).
■ Controlling this unit
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this
unit.
*1
These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
component selector switch position.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when the component
selector switch is set to AMP.
■ Controlling a TV
Set the component selector switch to TV to control your
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate
remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO (see
page 94). When you set the remote control codes for both
DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for
DTV/CBL.
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
component selector switch position.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when the component
selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/
Cable TV” column on page 93.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
ON SCREEN
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
PHONO
VCR
TUNER
V-AU X DV R
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
*1
*2
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER Turns on or off the power.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.
TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT Changes the input source.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AU X DV R
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
VCR
PHONO
ON SCREEN
*1
*2
93
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Controlling other components
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons
or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. You must
set the appropriate remote control code for each input
source (see page 94). The following table shows the
function of each control button used to control other
components assigned to each input selector button or the
blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. Be advised that
some buttons may not correctly operate the selected
component.
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 94).
*3
When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction.
*4
Press and hold to search backward or forward.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
1
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX VCRDVR
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
UU
U
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
ON SCREEN
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
2
3
4
7
9
5
6
8
1
Remote
control
DVD
player/
recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD player CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner
iPod
®
1 AV POWER
Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1
2 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Preset stations
(1-8)
3 TITLE
Title Band
4 PRESET/CH
u
Up
VCR channel
up
Up Preset up (1-8) Up
PRESET/CH
d
Down
VCR channel
down
Down
Preset down
(1-8)
Down
A/B/C/D/E j Left Left
Preset down
(A-E)
A/B/C/D/E i Right Right
Preset up
(A-E)
ENTER Enter Enter
Subsequent
menu
5 RETURN
Return Return
6 REC/
DISC SKIP
Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
*3
Rec *3 Rec *2*3 Disc skip Rec *3
p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play
w
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *4
f Search forward Search forward
Search forward
*2
Search forward Search forward Search forward
Search forward
*4
AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2 Sound
e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Pause
b Skip backward Skip backward
Skip backward
*2
Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
a Skip forward Skip forward
Skip forward
*2
Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop
7 ENT.
Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index
8 MENU
Menu Menu Previous menu
9 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
Notes
94
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can control your TV and other components by setting
the appropriate remote control code for each input source.
For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer
to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of
this manual.
The following table shows the default component in the
“Library (component category)” column and the remote
control code for each input source.
Remote Control Code Default Settings
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes.
y
The blank button is the one on the right of MD/CD-R.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons to
select the component you want to set up.
2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter
the five-digit remote control code for the
component to be used.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the remote control code for the
selected component is set.
y
Refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the
end of this manual.
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step
3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the
setup procedure.
• If you enter the code number “9980”, the remote control
code previously set for the selected component is cleared.
Setting the remote control code
Input
source
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
CD CD YAMAHA 61907
MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 70888
DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539
DTV/CBL – – –
TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916
V-AUX – – –
DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544
VCR –––
PHONO
–––
Blank
button
TAPE YAMAHA 70524
Note
Notes
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
VCR
PHONO
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ENHANCER
TRANSMIT
Flashes
95
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or
amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote
control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to
select and operate the desired component with the
supplied remote control.
■ Setting remote control AMP ID library
codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP ID library code for the component you want to use.
1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “00001” or “00002”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is
changed.
*1
The remote control setting
*2
The setting of this unit (see page 91)
• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID
of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 91).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library
codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
TUNER ID library code for the component you want to
use.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “81916” or “81917”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is
changed.
*1
The remote control setting
*2
The setting of this unit (see page 91)
• You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER
ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 91).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
Setting library codes
AMP ID
library code
*1
Function
Remote
control AMP
ID *2
00001
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
00002
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
ID2
Notes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
TUNER ID
library code
*1
Function
Remote
control
TUNER ID *2
81916
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
81917
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
ID2
Notes
TUNER
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
96
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory
settings.
1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “9981”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and all the remote control codes
previously set are cleared and reset to the initial
factory settings.
y
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step
2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the
clearing procedure.
Resetting all remote control codes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ENHANCER
TRANSMIT
Flashes
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
97
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce
separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone
using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the
infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need
to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown below.
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be
connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connecting Zone 2
REMOTE OUTREMOTE OUTREMOTE OUT REMOTE OUT
REMOTE INREMOTE INREMOTE IN
REMOTE IN
This unit
YAMAHA
component
YAMAH A
component
Infrared signal
receiver
98
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
■ Using the external amplifier
To use the external amplifiers in Zone 2, select “EXT” in “ZONE2 AMP” (see page 89).
• When you do not use the main zone, press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to turn off the main zone. Adjust the volume
control on the amplifier in the second zone.
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit
To use the internal amplifiers of this unit, select “INT” in “ZONE2 AMP” (see page 89).
Notes
REMOTE OUT
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
SP OUT
REMOTE IN
ZONE 2 OUTPUT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE 2
Infrared signal emitter
DVD player
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal receiver
Second zoneMain zone
This unit
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker
Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
PRESENCE/ZONE 2
Second zone
This unit
Main zone
99
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control
buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are listed as follows:
• Selecting the input source of Zone 2
• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source of Zone 2 (see page 52)
• Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source
(see page 101)
• Adjusting the volume level of the Zone 2 speakers
connected directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker
terminals of this unit when “ZONE2 AMP” in
“OPTION MENU” is set to “INT” (see page 89)
You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is
flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is
automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal
operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection
procedure.
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel
1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2.
y
ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when MASTER ON/
OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed
inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER or
STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone
and Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode.
2 Press ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.
The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
3 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the
desired input source while the ZONE2
indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the
TUNER features in Zone 2. For details about the
TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on
page 52.
• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod
features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod
operations, see “USING iPod®” on page 101.
y
To adjust the volume level of Zone 2, set “ZONE2 AMP” in
“OPTION MENU” to “INT” (see page 89) and then rotate
VOLUME.
4 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the
standby mode.
Controlling Zone 2
Note
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
ZONE2
Flashes
INPUT
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
100
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
■ Setting the remote control to the Zone 2
mode
The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control
the main zone. To control Zone 2 with the remote control, you
must first set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode.
1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “9992”.
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote
control
• The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control
the main zone, and the TRANSMIT indicator on the remote
control is turned off when the remote control is set to the main
mode.
• When the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode, POWER,
STANDBY, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, and the input selector
buttons are set to control Zone 2. However, the rest of the
remote control buttons remain in the main mode.
• The remote control automatically exits from the Zone 2 mode in
the following cases:
– when you do not make any operations within 10 seconds after
the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode.
– when you press a remote control button other than POWER,
STANDBY, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, and the input selector
buttons.
1 Press and hold POWER or STANDBY and
then press PHONO to set the remote control
to the Zone 2 mode.
• Press POWER when the main zone is turned on.
• Press STANDBY when the main zone is turned off.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
lights up while the remote control is set to the Zone 2
mode.
2 Press POWER to turn on Zone 2.
3 Press one of the input selector buttons to
select the desired input source of Zone 2.
y
To adjust the volume level of Zone 2, set “ZONE2 AMP” in
“OPTION MENU” to “INT” (see page 89) and then rotate
VOLUME.
4 Press STANDBY to set Zone 2 to the standby
mode.
Note
Notes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
TRANSMIT
POWER
PHONO
Lights up
While holding
down
STANDBY
or
POWER
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
VCR
PHONO
STANDBY
USING IPOD®
101
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 24), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 43).
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Compatibility with your iPod may vary depending on the software version of your iPod.
• The controls on your iPod are not operational when you operate your iPod using the OSD of this unit.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel or in the OSD of this unit.
• The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display up to 14 alphanumeric characters.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
components” on page 93.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 108.
You need to first assign the remote control code to V-AUX
on the remote control to control your iPod when “V-AUX”
is selected as the input source.
1 Press V-AUX on the remote control to select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
2 Press CODE SET on the remote control using
a ball point pen or a similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “81981”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the remote control code for V-AUX
is set.
Once the remote control code is assigned to V-AUX on the
remote control, you can control your iPod when “V-AUX”
is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod
can be done with or without the aid of the OSD of this
unit.
■ Controlling iPod without using the OSD
Once “V-AUX” is selected as the input source, you can
perform the basic operations of your iPod (see page 93)
using the supplied remote control without the aid of the
OSD of this unit.
Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
y
For a complete list of the remote control buttons used to control
your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
components” on page 93.
USING iPod
®
Notes
Setting the remote control code
V-AUX
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
PURE DIRECT
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
Controlling iPod
Note
102
USING iPod®
■ Controlling iPod using the OSD
Once “V-AUX” is selected as the input source, you can
perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the
supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this
unit. You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in
the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for
your iPod to suit your personal preferences.
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your
iPod.
• The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the
OSD.
• Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the
“Setup” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your
iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. For details, see
“Controlling iPod without using the OSD” on page 101.
y
• Press MENU on the remote control to move back to the
previous menu level.
• For a complete list of the remote control buttons used to control
your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
components” on page 93.
• A character that cannot be recognized by this unit will be
replaced with an underscore “_”.
1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display appears in the OSD.
2 Press u / d on the remote control to select
the desired menu and then press ENTER to
enter the selected menu.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers),
Setup (setup)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Setup > Shuffle, Repeat, Onscreen, FL Scroll
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off
” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a
random order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a
random order.
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the
highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs
or albums are being shuffled.
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the
highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one
song or a sequence of songs are being repeated.
On-screen display time Onscreen
Use this feature to set the amount of time for which the
OSD is displayed after you perform a certain operation on
your iPod.
Choices: Always, 5s, 10s
• Select “Always” to display the OSD unceasingly while
you are operating your iPod.
• Select “5s” to turn off the OSD 5 seconds after you
perform a certain operation on your iPod.
• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation on your iPod.
Front panel display scroll FL Scroll
Use this feature to set whether to display the iPod
operation status in the front panel display in a continuous
manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once.
Choices: Cont, Once
• Select “Cont” to display the iPod operation status in
the front panel display in a continuous manner.
• Select “Once” to display the iPod operation status in
the front panel display by 14 alphanumeric characters
at once.
Notes
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Setup
iPod Top
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Note
Note
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
103
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup
menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it
outward to the OFF position.
1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “PRESET”.
4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “RESET”.
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to
confirm your selection and turn off this unit.
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Notes
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
NEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
PURE DIRECT
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
3
1-2,5 2,4
MASTER
ON OFF
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
ON OFF
While holding
down
PROGRAM
PRESET-CANCEL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
PRESET-RESET
MASTER
ON OFF
TROUBLESHOOTING
104
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
30
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
13
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
19-27
“INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or
“ANALOG”.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”.
41
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH
INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control).
38, 44
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
13
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote
control.
38
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
40
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”
while playing a source encoded in DTS.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
41
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
87
105
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
30, 91
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output.
40
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
13
Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER
LEVEL”.
Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.
82
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
80
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
“7ch Stereo”) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
63
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
80
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
45
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE” and “SUR. B L/R SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B L/R SP” to a setting
other than “NONE”.
80
“SUR. B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set
to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. B L/R SP” to a setting other than
“NONE”.
80
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
81
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-
channel source is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
81
The source does not contain low-
frequency signals.
106
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
41
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
The volume level is
low while a record is
being played.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-
head amplifier.
23
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
20, 23
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
23
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”
is set to “ON”.
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
88
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
13
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
107
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
28
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
53
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
53
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations.
54, 55
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
53
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
108
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Remote control
■ iPod
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod
(see page 24).
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis
from the front panel.
8
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF
REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this
manual.
94
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
94
The library code of the remote control and
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
corresponding remote control library code.
91, 95
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Note
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
24
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Unknown type
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
iPod connected
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
Disconnected
Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
24
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
109
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ AUTO SETUP
Before AUTO SETUP
During AUTO SETUP
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
32
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.
—
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS
A or B.
38
Check the front L/R speaker connections. 13
E-2:NO SURR.SP
A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections.
13
E-3:NO PRNS SP
A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections.
13
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the
LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS
terminal if you only have one surround
back speaker.
13
E-5:NOISY
Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet
environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
—
E-6:CHECK SUR.
Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.
13
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
32
E-8:NO SIGNAL
The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting. 32
Check the speaker connections and
placement.
13
E-9:USER CANCEL
The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
32
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR
An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
32
110
TROUBLESHOOTING
After AUTO SETUP
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.
• If warning “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If warning “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made.
• If error “E-10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.
Warning message Cause Remedy
See
page
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper
polarity (+ or –).
13
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m.
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive. (No level correction
is made.)
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
—
Check the speaker connections. 13
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 33
Notes
GLOSSARY
111
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-
over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD video.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and
LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).
This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to the existing 5.1-channel format.
■ ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
GLOSSARY
Audio information
112
GLOSSARY
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P
B
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Video information
113
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
Sound field program information
SPECIFICATIONS
114
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................100 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[Asia, China, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................140 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω .......................................................135/170/200/245 W
• Maximum Output Power [Europe and Asia models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ......................................................150 W
• IEC Output Power [Europe and Asia models]
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................110 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................ 120 or more
• Frequency Response
CD terminal to Front L/R ..................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ...... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................ 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
Phono (5 mV) to REC OUT
[Europe, Australia, Asia and Korea models] ......... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ...................................................... 86 dB or more
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ............... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R .............................................................. 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shorted) to Front L/R ................. 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ........ 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ............................................... 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ......................................... 3.5 kHz
• Phones Output ......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO ................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................ 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT .............................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level/Output Impedance
REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT ....................................................................2 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 4 V/1.7 kΩ
ZONE 2 OUTPUT .............................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type ......................................................... PAL/NTSC
• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................... 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component ............................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION (except for U.K. model)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ...... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ........................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ...................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response ........................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION (except for U.K. model)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ............... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] .................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ........................................................... 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[China model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Europe model] ................................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[General model] ............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Asia model] ................................. AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 400 W/500 VA
[Other models] .................................................................. 440 W
• Standby Power Consumption .................................... 0.1 W or less
• AC Outlets
[Australia model] .............................. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)
[U.S.A., Canada and China models]... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Europe, Asia and General models]...... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 171 x 421 mm
(17.1 x 6.7 x 16.6 in)
• Weight .................................................................. 12.3 kg (27.1 lbs)
SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX-i
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE
LISTE DER FERNBEDIENUNGSCODES
LISTA ÖVER FJÄRRSTYRNINGSKODER
LIJST MET AFSTANDSBEDIENINGSCODES
СПИСОК КОДОВ ДИСТАНЦИОННОГО УПРАВЛЕНИЯ
CABLE TV RECEIVER
ABC 10003
ADB 11230, 11269
AICHI DENSHI11512
AMSTRAD 11222
AUNA 11230, 11269
AUSTAR 10276
BIRMINGHAM
CABLE COMMUNICATIONS
10276
BRITISH TELECOM
10003
CABLE & WIRELESS
11068
DX ANTENNA
11500, 11502
FASTWEB 11630
FRANCE TELECOM
10817, 11734
FREEBOX 11482
FUJITSU 11497
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
10003, 10276
GOLDEN CHANNEL
11110
HOMECHOICE11590
JERROLD 10003, 10276
MACAB 10817
MADRITEL 11230
MASPRO 11510
MOTOROLA 10276, 11106,
11483
MR ZAP 11112
MR. ZAP 11112
NEC 11496
NOKIA 11569
NOOS 10817, 11624
NTL 10003, 11060,
11068
ONO 11068
OPTUS 10276
PACE 11060, 11068,
11577
PANASONIC 10375, 11488
PHILIPS 10817
PIONEER 11021, 11500
PVP STEREO
VISUAL MATRIX
10003
SAGEM 10817, 11112,
11624
SAMSUNG 11060, 11666
SATBOX 10375
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
11510
SONY 11460
STARCOM 10003
SUMITOMO 11500, 11503,
11504
SUPERCABLE
10276
TELE DANMARK
11016
TELEWEST 11068
THOMSON 11110, 11734
TORX 10003
TOSHIBA 11509
TRI-VISION 11257
UNITED CABLE
10003
UPC 11582
US ELECTRONICS
10276
CABLE/PVR
COMBINATION
FRANCE TELECOM11734
FREEBOX 11482
MOTOROLA 11106
NOKIA 11569
NOOS 11624
SUPERCABLE 10276
THOMSON 11734
UPC 11582
DBS/PVR
COMBINATION
@SAT 11300
ATSAT 11300
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
11175
CANALSATELLITE
11339
COMAG 11412
DIGIFUSION 11645
DIRECTV 10099, 10639
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
11237
ECHOSTAR 10610
FORCE 11194
FOXTEL 11356
GBSAT 11214
HUMAX 11176, 11427,
11670, 11675
KATHREIN 11221, 11561
MAXIMUM 11334
NOKIA 11310, 11311
OPENTEL 11412
PACE 11423, 11623
PANASONIC 11320
PHILIPS 10099
REBOX 11214
SAGEM 11253, 11307,
11692
SHARP 11489
SIEMENS 11657
SKY 11175, 11848,
11850
SKYPLUS 11412
SONY 10639
STRONG 11300
THOMSON 11534, 11900
TOPFIELD 11206, 11545
TPS 11253, 11307
ZEHNDER 11075, 11412
SATELLITE RECEIVER
@SAT 11300
@SKY 11334
ABSAT 10713
ADB 10642, 11259,
11367, 11473,
11491
AIWA 11514, 11515
AKAI 10200
ALBA 10713, 11284
ALLSAT 10200, 11017,
11043
ALLSONIC 10369
ALLTECH 10713
ALLVISION 11232, 11334,
11412
AMITRONICA 10713
AMPERE 10132
AMSTRAD 10132, 10713,
10847, 10885,
11113, 11175
ANGLO 10713
ANKARO 10369, 10713,
11279
ANTSAT 11017, 11083
ARCON 11043, 11075,
11279
ARNION 11300
ASAT 10200
ASCI 10114, 11334,
11461
ASLF 10713
ASSCOM 10853
ASTON 11129
ASTRA 10713
ASTRO 10133, 10173,
10369, 10658,
11099, 11100,
11113
ATSAT 11300
ATSKY 11334
AUDIOLINE 11429
AURORA 10879
AUSTAR 10642, 10879,
11259
AXIS 10369, 11111
B@YTRONIC 11412
BENTLEY WALKER
11017
BEST 10369
BIG SAT 11457
BLACK DIAMOND
11284
BLAUPUNKT 10173
BLUE SKY 10713
BOCA 10132, 10713,
11232, 11366,
11474
BOSTON 11251
BRAINWAVE 10658
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
10847, 11175
BROCO 10713
BSKYB 10847, 11175
BT 11296
BUBU SAT 10713
BUSH 11284, 11471,
11672
CANAL DIGITAL
10853, 11622
CANAL+ 10853
CANALSATELLITE
10853, 11339,
11853
CENTREX 11457
CGV 11413
CHESS 10114, 10713,
11334
CITYCOM 10299, 10818,
11075, 11176,
11232
COLOMBIA 10132
COLUMBIA 10132
COMAG 10132, 11232,
11366, 11412,
11413, 11579
CONDOR 10369
CONRAD 10132, 10369
COSHIP 11457
CYRUS 10200
D-BOX 10873
DAEWOO 10713, 11111,
11296, 11743
DELTASAT 11075
DGTEC 11242
DIGENIUS 10299, 11161
DIGIALITY 11685
DIGIFUSION 11645
DIGIQUEST 11457, 11473
DIGISAT 11232
DIGISKY 11457
DIGITALL WORLD
11227
DIJAM 11296
DIRECTV 10099, 10639
DISTRATEL 10885, 11283,
11704
DMT 11075
DNT 10200
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
11237
DUNE 10369
DX ANTENNA 11530
ECHOSTAR 10167, 10610,
10713, 10853,
11200, 11323,
11409, 11467,
11473, 11477
EINHELL 10132, 10713
ELAP 10587, 10713,
11129, 11567
ELSAT 10713
ELTA 10200, 10369
EMME ESSE 10369
EMTECH 11214
ENGEL 10713, 11017,
11251
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page i Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-ii
EURIEULT 10885
EUROLINE 11251
EUROPHON 10132, 10299
EUROSKY 10114, 10132,
10262, 10299,
10369
EUROSTAR 10818, 10898
EUTELSAT 10713
FENNER 10369, 10713
FERGUSON 10711, 11291
FINLUX 10573
FLAIR MATE 10713
FMD 11457
FORCE 11194
FORTEC STAR 11017, 11083
FOXTEL 10879, 11356
FRACARRO 10125
FTEMAXIMAL10369, 10713,
11556
FUBA 10173, 10262,
10299, 10369,
10573, 11161,
11214
FUGIONKYO 10125
GALAXIS 10369, 10853,
11111, 11557
GARDINER 10818
GARNET 11075
GBSAT 11214
GECCO 11157, 11273,
11412
GENERAL SATELLITE
11176
GF 11043
GF STAR 11043
GLOBO 11251, 11626
GOD DIGITAL 10200
GOLD BOX 10292, 10853
GOLDEN INTERSTAR
11283
GOLDVISION 11017
GOODMANS 11246, 11284
GRUNDIG 10173, 10847,
10853, 10879,
11291
HAENSEL & GRETEL
10132
HANDAN 11622
HANSEATIC 11099, 11100
HAUPPAUGE 11672
HB 11214
HDT 11011
HE@D 11279
HIRSCHMANN10125, 10173,
10299, 10369,
10573, 11111,
11232, 11412
HITACHI 11250, 11284,
11518, 11523,
11525
HUMAX 11176, 11225,
11427, 11648,
11670, 11675,
11743
HUTH 10132, 11017,
11075
HYUNDAI 11011, 11075
ICAN 11367
ID DIGITAL 11176
ILLUSION SAT11557
IMPERIAL 11429
INGELEN 10114
INTERNATIONAL
10132
INTERSTAR 11017, 11214
JAEGER 11334
JVC 11507, 11531,
11532
K-SAT 10713
KAMM 10713
KAON 11300
KATELCO 11111
KATHREIN 10114, 10173,
10200, 10249,
10442, 10480,
10504, 10553,
10622, 10658,
10713, 10818,
10898, 11221,
11416, 11561,
11567
KENNEX 10125
KENWOOD 10853
KEY WEST 10132
KITON 10114
KOSCOM 11043
KOSMOS 10442
KREILING 10114, 10249,
10658, 11461
KREISELMEYER
10173
L&S ELECTRONIC
10132, 10369,
11043, 11334
LABGEAR 11296
LASAT 10132, 10173,
10299, 10369
LEMON 11461
LENCO 10369, 10713
LENOXX 11611
LG 11075, 11226
LIFESAT 10132, 10299,
10369, 10713,
11043
LIFETEC 10587
LODOS 11284
LOGIX 11017, 11075
LORENZEN 10132, 10299,
10867, 11161,
11579
LUPUS 10369
LUXOR 10573
LUXORIT 11681
M VISION 11557
MANATA 10132, 10713
MANHATTAN 11017, 11083
MARANTZ 10200
MASPRO 10173, 10713,
11520, 11530
MATSUI 10173, 11284
MAXIMUM 11075, 11334,
11685
MDS 11225
MEDIACOM 11206
MEDIASAT 10292, 10853
MEDION 10132, 10299,
10369, 10713,
11043, 11075,
11232, 11334,
11412, 11626
MEDISON 10713
MEGA 10200
MELECTRONIC
10818
METRONIC 10132, 10713,
10818, 10885,
11279, 11283,
11334, 11691,
11704
METZ 10173
MICRO 10713
MICRO ELEKTRONIC
10713
MICROMAXX 10299, 10369
MICROSTAR 11075
MICROTEC 10713
MORGAN'S 10132, 10200,
10713, 11232,
11412
MULTICHOICE10642, 10879
MYRYAD 10200
MYSAT 10713
NEC 11270, 11519
NEOTION 11334
NETGEM 11322
NETSAT 10099
NEUF TELECOM
11322
NEUF TV 11322
NEUHAUS 10713
NEULING 10132, 11232
NEUSAT 10587, 10713,
11279
NEVELING 11161
NEXTWAVE 11017
NIKKO 10200, 10713
NOKIA 10573, 10751,
10853, 10873,
11023, 11223,
11310, 11311,
11723
NORDMENDE 11611
OKANO 10442
OPENTEL 11232, 11412
OPTEX 10114, 10713,
11043, 11283
OPTUS 10879
ORBIS 11232, 11334,
11412
ORBITECH 10114, 10541,
11099, 11100
P/SAT 11232
PACE 10200, 10329,
10720, 10847,
10853, 10867,
11175, 11323,
11423, 11623,
11850
PACIFIC 11284
PACKARD BELL
11111
PALCOM 10299, 10587,
11161, 11409
PANASAT 10879
PANASONIC 10847, 11104,
11304, 11320,
11404, 11508,
11526, 11527,
11528
PANDA 10173
PANSAT 11011
PATRIOT 10132
PHILIPS 10099, 10133,
10173, 10200,
10292, 10818,
10853, 10898,
11114, 11118,
11672
PHONOTREND11017, 11200
PILOTIME 11339
PINO 11334
PIONEER 10292, 10329,
10352, 10853,
11308
PLASMATIC 10442
PMB 10713
PREISNER 10132, 10262,
11113, 11366
PREMIER 10292
PREMIERE 10292, 10873,
11429
PRIMACOM 11111
QUADRAL 10369
QUELLE 10299
RADIOLA 10200
RADIX 11113
RCA 11291
REBOX 11214
RED STAR 10369
REGAL 11251
RFT 10200, 10541
ROADSTAR 10713, 10853
ROVER 10369, 10713
S-ZWO 11207
SAB 11251
SABA 10885
SAGEM 10820, 11114,
11253, 11307,
11690, 11691,
11692, 11694
SAMSUNG 10853, 11017,
11206, 11243,
11293, 11458,
11570
SANYO 11219
SAT CONTROL11300
SAT TEAM 10713
SATEC 10713
SATELCO 10369, 11232
SATPLUS 11100
SATSTATION 11083
SCHAUB LORENZ
11214
SCHNEIDER 11206, 11251
SCHWAIGER 10132, 10504,
10587, 10885,
11075, 11083,
11111, 11334,
11412, 11457,
11474
SCS 10299
SEDEA ELECTRONIQUE
10125, 10132,
11206, 11283
SEG 10114, 10369,
11075, 11251,
11626
SEPTIMO 10885
SERINO 10610
SERVISAT 10713, 11251
SHARP 10541, 11489,
11513, 11517
SIEMENS 10173, 11657
SILVA 10299
SKANTIN 10713
SKARDIN 10587
SKR 10713
SKT 11449
SKY 10099, 10847,
11175, 11848,
11849, 11850
SKY ITALIA 11848, 11849
SKY XL 11251, 11412
SKY+ 11175
SKYMASTER 10587, 10713,
11075, 11200,
11409, 11611
SKYMAX 10200
SKYPLUS 11232, 11334,
11412
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page ii Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-iii
SKYSAT 10114, 10713
SKYVISION 11334
SL 10132, 10299
SM ELECTRONIC
10587, 10713,
11200, 11409
SMART 10132, 10299,
10713, 11113,
11157, 11232,
11273, 11413
SONY 10282, 10292,
10639, 10847,
10853, 11524,
11558
SR 10132
STARLITE 10200
STREAM 11848
STRONG 10125, 10132,
10369, 10713,
10820, 10853,
10879, 11146,
11157, 11258,
11300, 11409,
11430, 11626
SUNNY 11300
SUNNY SOUND
10369
SUNSAT 10713
SUNSTAR 10132, 10369,
10642
SYSTEC 11334
TARBS 11225
TBOSTON 11457
TEAC 11225, 11227,
11251, 11322
TECHNISAT 10114, 10200,
10262, 10541,
11099, 11100,
11322
TECHNOMATE
11283, 11610
TECHNOSONIC
11672
TECHNOTREND
11429
TECHNOWELT10132
TECHSAN 11017
TECHWOOD 10114, 11284
TEKCOMM 11017
TELE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC
11611
TELECIEL 11043
TELEKA 10262
TELESTAR 10114, 11099,
11100, 11251,
11334
TELESYSTEM 11251, 11409
TELETECH 10114
TELEVES 10132, 11214,
11300
TELEWIRE 11232
TEVEBOX 11681
TEVION 10713, 11409,
11622
THOMSON 10292, 10711,
10713, 10820,
10847, 10853,
11046, 11175,
11291, 11498,
11534, 11900
TINY 11672
TIOKO 10132
TOKAI 10200
TONNA 10587, 10713,
11611
TOPFIELD 11206, 11207,
11208, 11545,
11722
TOSHIBA 11501, 11516,
11530
TPS 10820, 11253,
11307
TRIAD 10372
TRIAX 10114, 10132,
10200, 10713,
10853, 11099,
11113, 11157,
11227, 11251,
11291, 11296
TT-MICRO 11429
TURNSAT 10713
TWINNER 10713
UEC 10879
UNIDEN 11521
UNISAT 10132, 10200
UNITED 11251
UNIVERSUM 10114, 10173,
10299, 11099,
11251
VAN HUNEN 11161
VARIOSAT 10173
VEGA 10369
VENTANA 10200
VESTEL 10114, 11251
VISIONIC 10125, 11279,
11283
VISIOSAT 10114, 10713,
11129, 11457
VTECH 10818
WISI 10173, 10299,
10372, 10406,
10638
WISPLUS 11258
WORLDSAT 10114, 11214,
11251, 11323
XRYPTON 10369
XSAT 10713, 10847,
11214, 11323
XTREME 11300
YAKUMO 11413
ZEHNDER 10114, 10369,
10504, 10818,
11075, 11232,
11251, 11334,
11412, 11413
HDTV DECORDER
PIONEER 11010
SHARP 11010
OTHER VIDEO
ACCESSORIES
ABS 11272
ALIENWARE 11272
CYBERPOWER11272
GATEWAY 11272
HAUPPAUGE 11408
HEWLETT PACKARD
11272
HOWARD COMPUTERS
11272
HP 11272
HUSH 11272
IBUYPOWER 11272
LINKSYS 11272
MEDIA CENTER PC
11272
MICROSOFT 11272
MIND 11272
NIVEUS MEDIA
11272
NORTHGATE 11272
PACKARD BELL
11272
PINNACLE SYSTEMS
11447
PIONEER 11010
RICAVISION 11272
SHARP 11010
SONY 11272, 11733
STACK 9 11272
SYSTEMAX 11272
TOSHIBA 11272
TOUCH 11272
VIEWSONIC 11272
VOODOO 11272
ZT GROUP 11272
TV
A.R. SYSTEMS20374, 20455
ACER 21339
ACURA 20009
ADL 21217
ADMIRAL 20093, 20163,
20264
ADVENT 20817
AGB 20516
AIKO 20009, 20264
AIM 20805
AIWA 21180
AKAI 20009, 20035,
20037, 20163,
20178, 20208,
20218, 20264,
20361, 20371,
20433, 20473,
20480, 20516,
20548, 20556,
20602, 20606,
20631, 20696,
20714, 20715,
20729, 20745,
20753, 21207
AKIBA 20037, 20218,
20455
AKITO 20037
AKURA 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20412, 20668,
20714, 21037,
21982
ALBA 20009, 20037,
20163, 20218,
20355, 20371,
20418, 20443,
20487, 20668,
20714, 21037
ALL-TEL 20865
ALLSTAR 20037
AMPLIVISION 20370
AMSTRAD 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20371, 20412,
20433, 20516,
21037
ANAM 20009, 20250
ANAM NATIONAL2
0250
ANDERSSON 21149, 21163
ANGLO 20009, 20264
ANITECH 20009, 20037
ANSONIC 20009, 20292,
20370, 20668
APEX DIGITAL20890, 21217
ARDEM 20037, 20714
ARISTONA 20037, 20556
ART 21037
ASORA 20009
ASUKA 20218, 20264
AUDIOSONIC 20009, 20037,
20109, 20218,
20264, 20370,
20374, 20486,
20714, 20715
AUDIOTON 20264, 20486
AUDIOWORLD20698
AWA 20009, 20108,
20606
AXXENT 20009
BAIRD 20208
BANG & OLUFSEN
20565
BASIC LINE 20009, 20037,
20218, 20374,
20455, 20556,
20668, 21037,
21163
BAUER 20805
BAUR 20037, 20361,
20512
BEAUMARK 20178
BEKO 20037, 20370,
20418, 20486,
20606, 20714,
20715, 20808,
21037
BELSON 20698
BEON 20037, 20418
BERTHEN 20668
BESTAR 20037, 20370,
20374
BESTAR-DAEWOO
20374
BLACK DIAMOND
20614, 20821,
21037, 21909
BLAUPUNKT 20170, 20195,
20200, 20327,
20455
BLUE SKY 20037, 20218,
20455, 20487,
20556, 20668,
20714, 20715,
20808, 21037,
21191
BLUESKY 21388
BOOTS 20009
BOXLIGHT 20736
BPL 20037, 20896
BRANDT 20109, 20335,
20560, 20625,
20714
BRINKMANN 20037, 20418,
20486, 20668
BTC 20218
BUSH 20009, 20037,
20208, 20218,
20264, 20355,
20361, 20371,
20374, 20487,
20556, 20614,
20617, 20660,
20668, 20698,
20714, 20778,
21037, 21243
BYDESIGN 21309, 21311
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page iii Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-iv
CANTON 20218
CARAD 20610, 20668,
21037
CARENA 20037, 20455
CARVER 20054, 20170
CASCADE 20009, 20037
CASIO 20037
CATHAY 20037
CCE 20037
CELEBRITY 20000
CELESTIAL 20820, 20821
CENTREX 20780
CENTRUM 21037
CENTURION 20037
CGE 20074, 20370,
20418
CHANGHONG 20821
CIMLINE 20009, 20218
CITIZEN 20060
CITY 20009
CLARIVOX 20037
CLATRONIC 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20370, 20371,
20606, 20714
CLAYTON 21037
CONDOR 20009, 20037,
20264, 20370,
20411, 20418
CONIA 20754
CONRAC 20808
CONTEC 20009, 20037
CONTINENTAL EDISON
20109, 20487
COSMEL 20037
CROSLEY 20054, 20074
CROWN 20009, 20037,
20053, 20208,
20370, 20412,
20418, 20486,
20487, 20606,
20712, 20714,
20715, 21037
CS ELECTRONICS
20218
CURTIS MATHES
20054, 20060,
20093, 20145
CYBERTRON 20218
CYTRONIX 21298
D-VISION 20556
DAEWOO 20009, 20037,
20218, 20374,
20556, 20634,
20865, 20880,
21307, 21909
DAINICHI 20218
DANSAI 20009, 20035,
20037, 20208
DANSETTE 20412
DANTAX 20714, 20715
DAVIS 20736
DAYTEK 21207
DAYTON 20009, 21207
DAYTRON 20374
DE GRAAF 20208, 20548
DECCA 20037, 20516
DENKO 20264
DENON 20145, 20511
DENVER 20037, 20587,
21189
DESMET 20009, 20037
DIAMANT 20037
DIAMOND 20825
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
20698
DIGATRON 20037
DIGILINE 20105, 20668
DIGITAL LIFE 20780, 20872,
20891
DIGITOR 20037, 20698
DIGIX 20880
DIXI 20009, 20037
DL 20891
DMTECH 21338
DOMEOS 20668
DOMLAND 20394
DREAM VISION
21704
DSE 20698
DUAL 20037, 20352,
20394
DVX 20891
DYNATRON 20037
E-ELITE 20218
ECCO 20773
EDISON-MINERVA
20487
EIKI 20735
ELBE 20292, 20411,
20435, 20516,
20610
ELBE-SHARP 20516
ELECTROBAND
20000
ELECTROGRAPH
21755
ELEKTA 20264
ELIN 20009, 20037,
20361, 20548
ELITE 20218
ELTA 20009, 20264
EMERSON 20037, 20178,
20361, 20370,
20371, 20486,
20714, 21909
ENVISION 21365
ERRES 20037
ESC 20037
ETRON 20001, 20009
EUROFEEL 20264
EUROMAN 20037, 20264
EUROPA 20037
EUROPHON 20516
EVOLUTION 21756
EXQUISIT 20037
FENNER 20009, 20374
FERGUSON 20037, 20053,
20109, 20195,
20335, 20443,
20548, 20560,
20625, 21037
FIDELITY 20037, 20163,
20264, 20361,
20371, 20412,
20512
FINLANDIA 20163, 20208,
20346, 20548
FINLUX 20037, 20105,
20346, 20411,
20473, 20480,
20492, 20516,
20631, 20714,
20715, 20808
FIRSTLINE 20009, 20037,
20208, 20361,
20374, 20411,
20556, 20668,
20714, 20808,
21037, 21191,
21307, 21363,
21388
FISHER 20208, 20370,
20555
FLINT 20037, 20218,
20264, 20455,
20610
FORCE 21149
FORMENTI 20037
FORTRESS 20093
FRABA 20037, 20370
FRIAC 20009, 20037,
20370, 20610
FRONTECH 20009, 20163,
20264
FUJIMARO 20865
FUJITSU 20009, 20683,
20853
FUJITSU GENERAL
20009, 20683
FUJITSU SIEMENS
21298
FUNAI 20264, 20668
GALAXI 20037
GALAXIS 20037, 20370
GATEWAY 21755, 21756
GBC 20009, 20218,
20374
GE 20093, 20178,
20560, 20625,
20735
GEC 20037, 20163,
20361, 20516
GELOSO 20009, 20374
GENERAL TECHNIC
20009
GENESIS 20009
GENEXXA 20009, 20163,
20218
GERICOM 20808, 20865,
20880, 21206,
21217, 21298
GOLDFUNK 20668
GOLDSTAR 20001, 20037,
20109, 20163,
20178, 20361,
20377, 20606,
20714, 20715
GOODING 20487
GOODMANS 20009, 20035,
20037, 20218,
20264, 20335,
20360, 20371,
20374, 20480,
20487, 20516,
20556, 20560,
20634, 20668,
20714, 20808,
20880, 21037,
21163, 21909
GORENJE 20370
GPM 20218
GRADIENTE 20053, 20170
GRAETZ 20163, 20361,
20371, 20487,
20714
GRANADA 20037, 20108,
20163, 20208,
20226, 20473,
20516, 20548,
20560
GRANDIN 20009, 20037,
20163, 20374,
20455, 20610,
20668, 20714,
20715, 20865,
20880, 21037,
21191, 21374,
21388
GRUNDIG 20037, 20195,
20443, 20487,
20556, 20587,
20740, 21223
H&B 20808
HAIER 20698, 20891
HALLMARK 20178
HANIMEX 20218
HANSEATIC 20009, 20037,
20361, 20377,
20394, 20556,
20634, 20714,
20808
HANTAREX 20009, 20037,
20516, 20829,
20865, 21338
HANTOR 20037
HARMAN/KARDON
20054
HARSPER 20865
HARWA 20773, 21196,
21269
HARWOOD 20009, 20037,
20412, 20487
HAVERMY 20093
HCM 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20412, 20418
HELIOS 20865
HEMA 20009
HIKONA 20218
HINARI 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20355
HISAWA 20218, 20455,
20610, 20714
HISENSE 20508, 20556,
20780, 21363
HITACHI 20037, 20105,
20108, 20109,
20145, 20163,
20178, 20225,
20473, 20480,
20481, 20492,
20516, 20548,
20578, 20634,
20744, 20797,
21037, 21149,
21194, 21576
HITACHI FUJIAN
20108
HITSU 20009, 20218,
20455, 20610
HOEHER 20714, 20865
HOME ELECTRONICS
20606
HORNYPHON 20037
HUANYU 20374
HUGOSON 20890, 21217
HUMAX 21295
HYPER 20009
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page iv Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-v
HYPSON 20037, 20264,
20455, 20668,
20714, 20715,
21037
HYUNDAI 20860, 20865,
20876, 21152,
21244, 21294
IBERIA 20037
ICE 20218, 20264,
20371
ICES 20218
IIYAMA 20877, 21217
IMPERIAL 20037, 20074,
20370, 20418
INDIANA 20037
INFINITY 20054
INFOCUS 20736, 20752,
21164, 21206
INGELEN 20163, 20487,
20610, 20714
INGERSOLL 20009
INNO HIT 20009, 20516,
21163
INNOWERT 20865, 21298
INTERBUY 20037, 20264
INTERFUNK 20037, 20163,
20200, 20327,
20361, 20512
INTERNAL 20037, 21909
INTERVISION 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20377, 20394,
20455, 20486,
20487
IRRADIO 20218, 20371
ISUKAI 20037, 20218,
20455
ITS 20264, 20371
ITT 20163, 20208,
20346, 20361,
20473, 20480,
20548, 20610
ITT NOKIA 20163, 20208,
20346, 20361,
20473, 20480,
20548, 20606,
20610
ITV 20037, 20264,
20374
IX 20877
JBL 20054
JCB 20000
JDV 21982
JENSEN 20817
JMB 20443, 20556,
20634
JOCEL 20712
JUBILEE 20556
JVC 20053, 20093,
20218, 20371,
20418, 20606,
20650, 20653,
20683, 20731
KAISUI 20009, 20037,
20218, 20455
KAPSCH 20163, 20361
KARCHER 20264, 20606,
20610, 20714,
20778
KATHREIN 20556
KAWA 20371
KB ARISTOCRAT
20163
KENDO 20037, 20411,
20610
KENNEDY 20435
KENNEX 21037
KIOTA 20001
KITON 20037, 20668
KNEISSEL 20037, 20292,
20374, 20411,
20435, 20556,
20610
KONKA 20037, 20218,
20371, 20418,
20587, 20641,
20714, 20754
KONTAKT 20487
KORPEL 20037
KOYODA 20009
KREISEN 20876
KYOSHU 20412, 20418
KYOTO 20163
L&S ELECTRONIC
20714, 20808
LASAT 20486
LEADER 20009
LECSON 20037
LEMAIR 20411
LENCO 20037, 20374
LEYCO 20037, 20264
LG 20037, 20178,
20442, 20556,
20698, 20714,
20715, 20829,
21146, 21148,
21191
LIESENK & TTER
20037
LIESENKOTTER
20037, 20327
LIFETEC 20037, 20218,
20374, 20668,
20714, 21037
LOCAL INDIA TV
20264, 20371,
20602
LODOS 21037
LOEWE 20037, 20136,
20292, 20512,
20516, 20633,
20790
LOGIK 20001, 20773,
20880, 21217
LOGIX 20668
LUKER 21982
LUMA 21037
LUX MAY 20009, 20037
LUXOR 20163, 20208,
20361, 20473,
20480, 20548,
20631, 21037,
21163
LXI 20054, 20156,
20178
M ELECTRONIC
20009, 20037,
20105, 20109,
20163, 20346,
20374, 20480
MADISON 20037
MAGNADYNE 20516
MAGNAFON 20516
MAGNAVOX 20054, 20780
MAGNUM 20037, 20714,
20715
MANESTH 20035, 20037,
20264
MANHATTAN 20037, 20668,
20778, 21037
MARANTZ 20037, 20054,
20412, 20556,
20704
MARK 20037, 20714,
20715
MASUDA 20009, 20218
MATSUI 20009, 20035,
20037, 20195,
20208, 20335,
20355, 20371,
20433, 20443,
20455, 20487,
20516, 20556,
20714, 21037
MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650
MAXENT 21755
MEDIATOR 20037
MEDION 20037, 20512,
20556, 20668,
20698, 20714,
20808, 20880,
21037, 21248
MEGAS 20610
MEGATRON 20145, 20178
MEI 21037
MELECTRONIC
20009, 20037,
20105, 20163,
20195, 20346,
20374, 20411,
20480, 20492,
20512, 20634,
20714
MEMOREX 20009, 20060,
20178, 20250,
21037
MERCURY 20009
METRONIC 20625
METZ 20037, 20367,
20388, 20447,
20587, 20668,
20746, 21163
MGA 20178
MICROMAXX 20037, 20668,
20808, 21037
MICROSTAR 20808
MIKOMI 21149
MINATO 20037
MINERVA 20108, 20487,
20516
MINOKA 20412
MITSUBISHI 20037, 20093,
20108, 20178,
20250, 20512,
20556, 21037
MIVAR 20292, 20516,
20609
MONACO 20009
MORGAN'S 20037
MOTOROLA 20093
MTC 20060, 20370,
20512
MTLOGIC 20714
MULTITEC 20037, 20486,
20668, 21037
MULTITECH 20009, 20037,
20264, 20486
MURPHY 20163
MUSIKLAND 20218
MYRYAD 20556
NAD 20156, 20178,
20361
NAIKO 20037, 20606,
21982
NAT 20226
NATIONAL 20226
NEC 20009, 20053,
20156, 20170,
20374, 20455,
20587, 20704,
21704
NECKERMANN
20037, 20200,
20327, 20370,
20411, 20418,
20556
NEI 20037, 20371
NEOVIA 20865, 20876,
21206, 21318,
21338, 21371,
21373, 21376,
21390
NETSAT 20037
NETTV 21755
NEUFUNK 20037, 20218,
20556, 20610,
20714
NIKKAI 20009, 20035,
20037, 20218,
20264
NIKKO 20178
NOKIA 20163, 20208,
20346, 20361,
20374, 20473,
20480, 20548,
20606, 20610,
20631
NORCENT 21365
NORDMENDE 20037, 20109,
20195, 20560,
20714
NORMEREL 20037
NOVATRONIC 20037, 20105,
20374
OCEANIC 20163, 20208,
20361, 20473,
20548
OKANO 20009, 20037,
20370
OMEGA 20264
OMNI 20891
ONIMAX 20714
ONWA 20218, 20371,
20433
OPTIMUS 20250, 20650
OPTONICA 20093
ORION 20037, 20355,
20412, 20443,
20516, 20556,
20714, 20880
ORLINE 20037, 20218
ORMOND 20668, 21037
ORSOWE 20516
OSAKI 20037, 20218,
20264, 20355,
20374, 20412,
20556
OSO 20218
OSUME 20037, 20218
OTTO VERSAND
20037, 20093,
20109, 20226,
20361, 20512,
20556
PACIFIC 20443, 20556,
20714, 21037
PALLADIUM 20037, 20370,
20411, 20418,
20714
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page v Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-vi
PALSONIC 20001, 20037,
20264, 20418,
20698, 20773
PANAMA 20037, 20264
PANASHIBA 20001
PANASONIC 20037, 20163,
20226, 20250,
20361, 20367,
20516, 20548,
20650, 20853,
21210, 21310
PANAVISION 20037, 20411
PATHE CINEMA
20163
PAUSA 20009
PENNEY 20060, 20156,
20178
PERDIO 20037, 20163
PHILCO 20037, 20054,
20074, 20145,
20370, 20418
PHILIPS 20009, 20037,
20054, 20200,
20361, 20374,
20556, 20772,
21756
PHOENIX 20037, 20486
PHONOLA 20037
PIONEER 20037, 20109,
20163, 20361,
20486, 20512,
20679, 20760
PIONIER 20486
PLANTRON 20009
PLAYSONIC 20037, 20714,
20715
POLAROID 20865
PORTLAND 20374
POWERPOINT
20037, 20487,
20698
PRANDONI-PRINCE
20361, 20516
PRIMA 20264, 20412
PRINSTON 21037
PRINZ 20361
PROFEX 20009, 20163,
20361
PROFI 20009
PROFITRONIC
20037
PROLINE 20037, 20411,
20625, 20634,
21037
PROSONIC 20037, 20668,
20714
PROTECH 20009, 20037,
20264, 20418,
20486, 20668,
21037
PROTON 20178
PROVISION 20037, 20556,
20714
PROXIMA 20735
PYE 20037, 20374,
20556
QUADRAL 20218
QUASAR 20009, 20250,
20650, 20865
QUELLE 20037, 20074,
20200, 20327,
20361, 20512,
20668, 21037
R-LINE 20037
RADIALVA 20218
RADIOLA 20037, 20556
RADIOMARELLI
20037, 20516
RADIOSHACK 20037, 20178
RADIOTONE 20009, 20037,
20264, 20412,
20668, 21037
RCA 20093, 20625,
20679
REALISTIC 20178
REDIFFUSION 20346, 20361,
20548
REFLEX 20037, 20668,
21037
RELISYS 20865, 20876,
20877, 20878,
21206, 21207,
21268, 21298
REOC 20714
REVOX 20037
REX 20163, 20264,
20411
RFT 20037, 20264
RINEX 20773
ROADSTAR 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20418, 20668,
20714, 21037,
21189
ROVER 20877
ROWA 20698, 20712
ROYAL LUX 20335, 20412
SABA 20109, 20163,
20250, 20335,
20361, 20498,
20516, 20548,
20560, 20625,
20714
SAGEM 20455, 20610,
20830, 21313
SAISHO 20009, 20264,
20516
SAIVOD 20037, 20668,
20712, 21037,
21163, 21982
SAKAI 20163
SALORA 20163, 20208,
20361, 20480,
20516, 20548,
20631
SALSA 20335
SAMBERS 20516
SAMPO 21755
SAMSUNG 20009, 20037,
20060, 20163,
20178, 20208,
20264, 20370,
20482, 20556,
20587, 20618,
20644
SANSUI 20037, 20727,
20729, 20861
SANTON 20009
SANYO 20088, 20108,
20170, 20208,
20370, 20555,
20704, 20735
SBR 20037, 20556
SCEPTRE 21217
SCHAUB LORENZ
20361, 20374,
20486, 20548,
20606, 20714,
21191
SCHNEIDER 20037, 20163,
20218, 20352,
20361, 20371,
20394, 20556,
20668, 20714,
21037
SCOTCH 20178
SCOTLAND 20163
SCOTT 20178
SEARS 20054, 20156,
20178
SEAWAY 20634
SEELVER 21037
SEG 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20487, 20634,
20668, 21037,
21163
SEI 20516
SEI-SINUDYNE
20037, 20516
SELECO 20163, 20264,
20346, 20371,
20411, 20435
SEMP 20156
SENCORA 20009
SENTRA 20035
SERINO 20093, 20455,
20610
SHARP 20053, 20093,
20200, 20491,
20516, 21163,
21193
SHENG CHIA 20093
SHINTOSHI 20037
SHIVAKI 20037, 20443
SIAREM 20516
SIEMENS 20037, 20195,
20200, 20327
SIERA 20556
SIESTA 20370
SILVA 20037, 20361
SILVA SCHNEIDER
20037
SILVER 20361, 20715
SILVERCREST 21037
SINGER 20009, 20335,
20433, 20435
SINOTEC 20773
SINUDYNE 20516
SKY 20037, 20880
SKYSONIC 20696
SLIDING 20865, 20880,
21318, 21374,
21388
SLX 20668
SMARAGD 20487
SOEMTRON 20865, 21298
SOLAVOX 20037, 20163,
20361, 20548
SONAWA 20218
SONIKO 20037
SONITRON 20208, 20370
SONOKO 20009, 20037
SONOLOR 20163, 20208,
20361, 20548
SONTEC 20009, 20037,
20370
SONY 20000, 20037,
20053, 20093,
20145, 20156,
20170, 20250,
20353, 21100,
21505, 21751
SOUND & VISION
20374
SOUNDESIGN 20178
SOUNDWAVE 20037, 20418,
20715
SPECTRA 20009
SSANGYONG 20009
STANDARD 20009, 20037,
20218, 20374,
21037
STARLITE 20009, 20037,
20264
STENWAY 20218
STERN 20163, 20411
STEVISON 21982
STRATO 20009, 20037,
20264
STRONG 21149, 21163
SUNKAI 20355, 20455,
20487, 20610,
20865
SUNSTAR 20009, 20037,
20264, 20371
SUNWOOD 20037
SUPERLA 20516
SUPERSCAN 20093
SUPERSONIC 21189
SUPERTECH 20009, 20037,
20218
SUPRA 20009
SUPREME 20000
SUSUMU 20218, 20335
SVA 20587, 20865,
20872
SYLVANIA 20054
SYSLINE 20037
T+A 20447
TANDBERG 20367
TANDY 20093, 20163,
20218
TARGA 21307
TASHIKO 20163
TATUNG 20037, 20516,
21756
TCM 20714, 20808
TEAC 20009, 20037,
20170, 20178,
20264, 20412,
20418, 20455,
20512, 20668,
20698, 20712,
21037, 21149,
21755, 21909
TEC 20009, 20037
TECH LINE 20037, 20668
TECHNICS 20250, 20556,
20650
TECHNISAT 20556
TECHNISSON 20714
TECHNOSONIC
20556
TECHWOOD 21163
TECNIMAGEN 20556
TEDELEX 20009, 20891
TEKNIKA 20054, 20060
TELECOR 20394
TELEFUNKEN 20037, 20074,
20109, 20335,
20346, 20486,
20498, 20560,
20625, 20714,
20896
TELEFUSION 20037
TELEGAZI 20037
TELEMAGIC 20735
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page vi Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-vii
TELESONIC 20037
TELESTAR 20037, 20556
TELESYSTEM 20876
TELETECH 20009, 20037,
20668, 21037
TELEVIEW 20037
TEMPEST 20009
TENNESSEE 20037
TENSAI 20009, 20037,
20105, 20218,
20371, 20374,
20377, 20715,
21037
TENSON 20009
TEVION 20556, 20668,
20714, 20808,
21037, 21248,
21298
TEXET 20009, 20218,
20374
THOMSON 20037, 20109,
20335, 20560,
20625
THORN 20035, 20037,
20074, 20109,
20335, 20361,
20512
TINY 21269
TINY DIGITAL 20660
TMK 20178
TOKAI 20009, 20037,
20163, 20374,
20668, 21037
TOKAIDO 21037
TOKYO 20035
TOMASHI 20218
TONGTEL 20780
TOSHIBA 20035, 20060,
20109, 20156,
20195, 20241,
20508, 20618,
20650, 20714,
20736, 21163,
21164, 21704
TRANS CONTINENS
20037, 20668,
21037
TRANS-CONTINENTS
20865, 21374
TRANSONIC 20009, 20037,
20587, 20698,
20712
TRIDENT 20516
TRISTAR 20218
TRIUMPH 20346, 20516,
20556
TVTEXT 95 20556
UHER 20037, 20374,
20418, 20480,
20486
ULTRAVOX 20037
UNIC LINE 20037, 20455
UNITED 20037, 20714,
20715, 21037
UNIVERSAL 20037
UNIVERSUM 20009, 20037,
20074, 20105,
20170, 20200,
20264, 20327,
20346, 20361,
20370, 20411,
20418, 20473,
20480, 20492,
20512, 20618,
20631, 20668,
21037, 21163
UNIVOX 20037, 20163
V2MAX 20865
V7 VIDEOSEVEN
21376, 21755
V7VIDEOSEVEN
20880
VESTEL 20037, 20556,
20668, 21037,
21163
VICTOR 20053, 20653
VIDEOCON 20508
VIDEOLOGIC 20218
VIDEOLOGIQUE
20218
VIDIKRON 20054, 20735
VIDTECH 20178
VIEWPIA 20876
VIEWSONIC 20797, 21755
VIORE 21207
VISION 20037
VIZIO 21756
VOXSON 20163, 20178,
20418
WALTHAM 20037, 20109,
20163, 20418,
20443, 20668,
21037
WARDS 20000, 20054,
20060, 20156,
20178
WATSON 20009, 20037,
20218, 20394,
20668, 21037
WAYCON 20156
WEGA 20037
WELLTECH 20714
WESTINGHOUSE
20890
WHARFEDALE
20037, 20556
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
20037, 21909
WINDSOR 21037
WINDY SAM 20556
WORLD-OF-VISION
20865, 20877,
20880, 20890,
21298
X-VIEW 21191
XENIUS 20634
XLOGIC 20860
XORO 21196, 21217,
21243
XRYPTON 20037
YAMADA 21340
YAMAHA 20650, 20769,
20797, 21405,
21406, 21407,
21576
YAMISHI 20455
YAPSHE 20250
YOKAN 20037
YOKO 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264
ZANUSSI 20264
ZENITH 20178, 21909
PVR
ABS 31972
ALIENWARE 31972
CYBERPOWER
31972
DELL 31972
GATEWAY 31972
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
HP 31972
HUSH 31972
IBUYPOWER 31972
JVC 31279
LINKSYS 31972
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
MICROSOFT 31972
MIND 31972
NIVEUS MEDIA31972
NORTHGATE 31972
PANASONIC 31244, 31807,
31808, 31809
PHILIPS 31340
SONY 31636, 31972
STACK 9 31972
SYSTEMAX 31972
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
TOSHIBA 30828, 31008,
31972
TOUCH 31972
VIEWSONIC 31972
VOODOO 31972
ZT GROUP 31972
VCR
ABS 31972
ACCENT 30072
ADMIRAL 30048
ADVENTURA 30000
ADYSON 30072
AIKO 30278
AIWA 30000, 30032,
30037, 30307,
30348, 30352
AKAI 30041, 30106,
30240, 30315,
30348, 30352,
30642
AKIBA 30072
AKURA 30072
ALBA 30000, 30072,
30081, 30278,
30315, 30348,
30352
ALIENWARE 31972
ALLSTAR 30081
AMERICA ACTION
30278
AMSTRAD 30000, 30072,
30278
ANAM 30037, 30162,
30226, 30240
ANAM NATIONAL
30162, 30226
ANITECH 30072
ANSONIC 30000
ARISTONA 30081
ASA 30037, 30081
ASHA 30240
ASUKA 30037, 30038
AUDIOSONIC 30278
AUDIOVOX 30037, 30278
AVP 30000, 30352
AWA 30043
BAIRD 30000, 30041,
30104, 30106
BASIC LINE 30072, 30104,
30278
BEAUMARK 30240
BEKO 30104
BELL & HOWELL
30104
BESTAR 30278
BLACK DIAMOND
30642
BLACK PANTHER
30278
BLAUPUNKT 30034, 30081,
30162, 30226
BLUE SKY 30037, 30072,
30278, 30348,
30352, 30480,
30642
BONDSTEC 30072
BRANDT 30041, 30206,
30320, 30321
BRANDT ELECTRONIQUE
30041
BRINKMANN 30348
BROKSONIC 30348
BUSH 30000, 30072,
30081, 30278,
30315, 30348,
30352, 30642
CALIX 30037
CARREFOUR 30045
CARVER 30081
CASIO 30000
CATHAY 30278
CCE 30072, 30278
CGE 30000
CIMLINE 30072
CITIZEN 30037, 30278
CLATRONIC 30000, 30072
COLT 30072
COMBITECH 30352
CONDOR 30278
CRAIG 30037, 30072,
30240
CROWN 30037, 30072,
30278, 30480
CURTIS MATHES
30041, 30162
CYBERNEX 30240
CYBERPOWER31972
CYRUS 30081
DAEWOO 30045, 30278,
30352, 30637,
30642
DANSAI 30072, 30278
DANTAX 30352
DE GRAAF 30042, 30048,
30081, 30104,
30166
DECCA 30000, 30067,
30081, 30352
DEITRON 30278
DELL 31972
DENKO 30072
DENON 30042
DIAMANT 30037
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page vii Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-viii
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
30642
DIGITOR 30642
DSE 30642
DUAL 30000, 30041,
30081, 30278,
30348
DUMONT 30000, 30081,
30104
DYNATECH 30000
ELBE 30038, 30278
ELCATECH 30072
ELECTROHOME
30037
ELECTROPHONIC
30037
ELIN 30240
ELSAY 30072
ELTA 30072, 30278
EMEREX 30032
EMERSON 30000, 30037,
30043, 30045,
30072, 30278,
30637
ESC 30240, 30278
FERGUSON 30000, 30041,
30278, 30320,
30321
FIDELITY 30000, 30072,
30240, 30352
FINLANDIA 30000, 30037,
30042, 30043,
30048, 30081,
30104, 30106,
30166, 30226
FINLUX 30000, 30042,
30081, 30104
FIRSTLINE 30037, 30043,
30045, 30072,
30278, 30348,
30480
FISHER 30104
FLINT 30348
FRONTECH 30072
FUJI 30033
FUJITSU 30000, 30045
FUNAI 30000
GALAXIS 30278
GARRARD 30000
GATEWAY 31972
GE 30048, 30240,
30320
GEC 30081
GENERAL 30045
GENERAL TECHNIC
30348
GENEXXA 30104
GOLDHAND 30072
GOLDSTAR 30037, 30038,
30480
GOODMANS 30000, 30037,
30072, 30081,
30278, 30348,
30352, 30637,
30642
GPX 30037
GRADIENTE 30000
GRAETZ 30041, 30104,
30240
GRANADA 30000, 30037,
30042, 30048,
30081, 30104,
30226, 30240
GRANDIN 30000, 30037,
30072, 30278
GRUNDIG 30034, 30072,
30081, 30226,
30320, 30347,
30348, 30352
HANIMEX 30352
HANSEATIC 30037, 30038,
30081
HARLEY DAVIDSON
30000
HARMAN/KARDON
30038, 30081
HARWOOD 30072
HCM 30072
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HINARI 30041, 30072,
30240, 30278,
30352
HISAWA 30352
HISCHITO 30045
HITACHI 30000, 30037,
30041, 30042,
30081, 30166,
30240
HOEHER 30278, 30642
HORNYPHON 30081
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
HP 31972
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
30042
HUSH 31972
HYPSON 30000, 30037,
30072, 30278,
30480
IBUYPOWER 31972
IMPERIAL 30000
INGERSOLL 30240
INNO HIT 30072
INTERBUY 30072
INTERFUNK 30081, 30104
INTERNAL 30278, 30637
INTERNATIONAL
30037, 30278,
30642
INTERVISION 30000, 30278
IRRADIO 30072, 30081
ITT 30041, 30104,
30106, 30240
ITV 30037, 30278
JBL 30278
JENSEN 30041
JMB 30348, 30352
JOYCE 30000
JVC 30041, 30067,
30206, 31008,
31279
KAISUI 30072
KAMBROOK 30037
KARCHER 30081, 30278,
30642
KEC 30037, 30278
KENDO 30072, 30106,
30278, 30315,
30348, 30642
KENWOOD 30038, 30041,
30067
KLH 30072
KNEISSEL 30037, 30278,
30348, 30352
KODAK 30037
KORPEL 30072
KYOTO 30072
LENCO 30278
LEYCO 30072
LG 30037, 30480
LIFETEC 30348
LINKSYS 31972
LLOYD'S 30000
LOEWE 30037, 30081,
30162, 31562
LOGIK 30072, 30106,
30240
LUX MAY 30072
LUXOR 30043, 30048,
30104, 30106,
30315
LXI 30037
M ELECTRONIC
30000, 30038
MAGNASONIC30278
MAGNAVOX 30000, 30081,
30642
MAGNIN 30240
MAGNUM 30642
MANESTH 30045, 30072,
30081
MARANTZ 30038, 30081
MARK 30000, 30278
MARTA 30037
MASTEC 30642
MASTER'S 30278
MATSUI 30240, 30348,
30352
MATSUSHITA 30162, 30226
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
MEDION 30348, 30352,
30642
MELECTRONIC
30000, 30037,
30038
MEMOREX 30000, 30037,
30048, 30104,
30162, 30240,
30307, 30348
MEMPHIS 30072
METRONIC 30081
METZ 30037, 30081,
30162, 30226,
30347, 30836,
31562
MGA 30043, 30240
MGN TECHNOLOGY
30240
MICORMAY 30348
MICROSOFT 31972
MIND 31972
MINOLTA 30042
MITSUBISHI 30043, 30048,
30067, 30081,
30480, 30642
MOTOROLA 30048
MTC 30000, 30240
MULTITEC 30037
MULTITECH 30000, 30072
MURPHY 30000
MYRYAD 30081
NAD 30104
NAIKO 30348, 30642
NATIONAL 30226
NEBULA ELECTRONICS
30033
NEC 30037, 30038,
30041, 30067,
30104, 30278
NECKERMANN
30081
NESCO 30072
NIKKAI 30072, 30278
NIKKO 30037
NIKON 30034
NIVEUS MEDIA
31972
NOBLEX 30240
NOKIA 30041, 30042,
30048, 30081,
30104, 30106,
30240, 30278,
30315
NORDMENDE 30041, 30067,
30320, 30321
NORTHGATE 31972
OCEANIC 30000, 30041,
30048, 30081,
30104, 30106
OKANO 30072, 30278,
30315, 30348
OLYMPUS 30226
ONIMAX 30642
OPTIMUS 30037, 30048,
30104, 30162
ORBIT 30072
ORION 30348, 30352
OSAKI 30000, 30037,
30072
OSUME 30072
OTTO VERSAND
30081
PACE 30352
PACIFIC 30000, 30348,
30642
PACKARD BELL
31972
PALLADIUM 30037, 30041,
30072, 30348
PALSONIC 30000, 30072,
30642
PANASONIC 30162, 30226,
30836, 31244,
31562, 31807,
31808, 31809
PATHE CINEMA
30043
PATHE MARCONI
30041
PENNEY 30037, 30038,
30042, 30240
PENTAX 30042
PERDIO 30000
PHILCO 30038, 30072
PHILIPS 30081
PHOENIX 30278
PHONOLA 30081
PILOT 30037
PIONEER 30042, 30067,
30081, 30162
POLK AUDIO 30081
PORTLAND 30278, 30637
PRINZ 30000
PROFITRONIC
30081, 30240
PROLINE 30000, 30278,
30320, 30642
PROSONIC 30278
PROTEC 30072
PROTECH 30081
PROVISION 30278
PYE 30081
QUASAR 30162, 30278
QUELLE 30081
RADIALVA 30037, 30048
RADIOLA 30081
RADIONETTE 30037
RADIOSHACK 30000, 30037
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page viii Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-ix
RADIX 30037
RANDEX 30037
RANK ARENA 30041
RCA 30042, 30048,
30106, 30240,
30320
REALISTIC 30000, 30037,
30048, 30104
REOC 30348
REX 30041
RFT 30072
RICAVISION 31972
RICOH 30034
ROADSTAR 30037, 30072,
30081, 30240,
30278
ROYAL 30072
SABA 30041, 30206,
30278, 30320,
30321
SAISHO 30348
SALORA 30043, 30104,
30106
SAMSUNG 30045, 30240
SANKY 30048
SANSUI 30000, 30041,
30067, 30072,
30106
SANYO 30048, 30067,
30104, 30240
SAVILLE 30240, 30278,
30352
SBR 30081
SCHAUB LORENZ
30000, 30041,
30104, 30106,
30315, 30348
SCHNEIDER 30000, 30037,
30042, 30072,
30081, 30240,
30278, 30348,
30352, 30642
SCOTT 30043, 30045
SEARS 30000, 30037,
30042, 30104
SEAWAY 30278
SEG 30072, 30081,
30240, 30278,
30637, 30642
SEI 30081
SELECO 30037, 30041
SEMP 30045
SENTRA 30072
SHARP 30037, 30048
SHINTOM 30072, 30104
SHIVAKI 30037
SHOGUN 30240
SIEMENS 30037, 30081,
30104, 30320,
30347
SIERA 30081
SILVA 30037
SILVER 30278
SINGER 30045, 30072
SINUDYNE 30081, 30352
SMARAGD 30348
SONNECLAIR 30072
SONTEC 30037
SONWA 30642
SONY 30000, 30032,
30033, 30034,
30106, 31032,
31636, 31972
SOUNDWAVE 30037, 30348
SSANGYONG 30072
STACK 9 31972
STERN 30278
STS 30042
SUNKAI 30278, 30348
SUNSTAR 30000
SUNTRONIC 30000
SUNWOOD 30072
SUPRA 30037
SYLVANIA 30000, 30043,
30081
SYMPHONIC 30000
SYSTEMAX 31972
T+A 30162
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
TANDBERG 30278
TANDY 30000, 30104
TASHIKO 30000, 30037,
30048, 30081,
30240
TATUNG 30000, 30041,
30043, 30048,
30081, 30348,
30352
TCHIBO 30348
TCM 30348
TEAC 30000, 30037,
30041, 30278,
30307, 30637,
30642
TEC 30072
TECH LINE 30072
TECHNICS 30081, 30162,
30226
TEDELEX 30642
TEKNIKA 30000, 30037
TELEAVIA 30041
TELEFUNKEN 30041, 30206,
30278, 30320,
30321, 30642
TELERENT 30226
TELETECH 30000, 30072,
30278
TENOSAL 30072
TENSAI 30000, 30072,
30278
TEVION 30348, 30642
TEXET 30278
THOMAS 30000
THOMSON 30041, 30067,
30278, 30320,
30321
THORN 30037, 30041,
30104
TMK 30240
TOKAI 30037, 30072
TOPLINE 30348
TOSHIBA 30041, 30042,
30043, 30045,
30081, 30352,
30828, 31008,
31972
TOTEVISION 30037, 30240
TOUCH 31972
TOWADA 30072
TRADEX 30081
UHER 30240
ULTRAVOX 30278
UNITECH 30240
UNITED 30348
UNIVERSUM 30000, 30037,
30081, 30104,
30106, 30240,
30348
VECTOR 30045
VECTOR RESEARCH
30038
VICTOR 30041, 30067
VIDEO CONCEPTS
30045
VIDEO TECHNIC
30000
VIDEOMAGIC 30037
VIDEOSONIC 30240
VIEWSONIC 31972
VILLAIN 30000
VOODOO 31972
WARDS 30000, 30033,
30038, 30042,
30045, 30048,
30072, 30081,
30240
WATSON 30081, 30352,
30642
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
30072, 30278,
30637
WORLD 30348
XR-1000 30000, 30072
YAMAHA 30038
YAMISHI 30072, 30278
YOKAN 30072
YOKO 30037, 30240
ZENITH 30000, 30033,
30034, 30637
ZT GROUP 31972
ZX 30348, 3035
DVD PLAYER
3D LAB 40539
A-TREND 40714
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
40713, 40730,
41450
AEG 40770, 40788,
40790
AIRIS 40672, 41005,
41107
AIWA 40533, 40641
AKAI 40766, 40770,
40788, 40790,
40898, 41115,
41233
AKI 41005
AKURA 40898, 41140,
41170, 41233,
41367
ALBA 40539, 40672,
40695, 40713,
40730, 41140
ALCO 40790
ALIZE 41151
ALL-TEL 41451
ALLEGRO 40869
AMITECH 40770, 40850
AMOI 40852
AMPHION MEDIA WORKS
40872
AMSTRAD 40713
AMW 40872
ANSONIC 40759, 40831
APEX DIGITAL40672, 41004,
41020, 41833
ARIANET 40818
AUDIOSONIC 41265
AUDIOVOX 40790
AUVIO 40843, 41090
AVIOUS 41165
AXION 40730
BASE 41451
BASIC LINE 40713
BAZE 40898, 41165
BBK 40862
BEL CANTO DESIGN
41571
BELLAGIO 41004
BLACK DIAMOND
40713, 40766,
40833
BLUE PARADE40571
BLUE SKY 40651, 40672,
40695, 40713,
40804, 40843
BOGHE 41004
BOMAN 40898
BRAINWAVE 40770, 41115
BRANDT 40503, 40651
BROKSONIC 40695
BUSH 40516, 40672,
40695, 40713,
40730, 40831,
40833, 40879,
41128, 41165
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
41109
CCE 40730
CELESTIAL 41020
CENTREX 40672, 41004
CENTRUM 40713, 40779,
41005
CGV 40751, 41115
CINEA 40831, 40841
CINETEC 40713
CINEVISION 40833, 40869,
41483
CLASSIC 40730
CLATRONIC 40672, 40788,
40818, 41165
CLAYTON 40713
COBY 40730, 40852,
41107, 41165
CODEX 41233
COMPACKS 41107, 41265
CONIA 40852
CONTINENTAL EDISON
40831
CRAIG 40831
CROWN 40770, 41115
CRYPTO 41228
CYBERCOM 40831
CYBERHOME 40714, 40816,
41023
CYTRON 40651
D-VISION 41115
DAENYX 40872
DAEWOO 40705, 40714,
40770, 40833,
40869, 40872
DAEWOO INTERNATIONAL
40872
DALTON 41036, 41107
DANSAI 40770, 41115
DANTAX 40539, 40713,
40723, 40790
DAYTEK 40872, 41005
DAYTON 40872
DCE 40831
DECCA 40770, 41115
DENON 40490, 40634,
41282, 41634
DENVER 40788, 40898,
41107, 41165,
41450
DESAY 40843, 41090
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page ix Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-x
DIAMOND 40651, 40768
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
40833, 41483
DIGATRON 41009
DIGIHOME 40713
DIGITOR 41005
DIGITREX 40672
DIK 40831
DINAMIC 40788
DISNEY 40675
DIVIDO 40705
DK DIGITAL 40831
DMTECH 41271
DRAGON 40831
DREAMX 41151
DSE 40833, 41483
DUAL 40651, 40665,
40713, 40730,
40779, 40790,
40831
DURABRAND 40713, 40831
EASY HOME 40857
ECC 40730
ECLIPSE 40723, 40751
ELFUNK 40850
ELIN 40770
ELLION 40850
ELTA 40672, 40770,
40788, 40850,
41115, 41151
ELTAX 40766
EMERSON 40591, 40675,
40705
ENTERPRISE 40591
ENZER 41228
EUROLINE 40788, 41115,
41233
FENNER 40651
FERGUSON 40651, 40898
FINLUX 40591, 40672,
40741, 40751,
40770, 41165
FIRSTLINE 40713, 40843,
40869
FISHER 40670
FUNAI 40675, 40695
FUSION 40862
GE 40522
GLOBAL SOLUTIONS
40768
GO VIDEO 40741, 40744,
40833, 40869,
41075, 41483
GOLDSTAR 40591, 40741
GOODMANS 40651, 40713,
40723, 40730,
40790, 40833,
40879, 41004,
41140
GRAETZ 40665
GRAN PRIX 40831, 40898
GRANDIN 40713, 41233
GRUNDIG 40539, 40651,
40670, 40695,
40705, 40713,
40775, 40790,
41004, 41036,
41128
GRUNKEL 40770
H & B 40818, 40841,
40850, 41233
H&B 40713, 40818,
40841, 40850,
41233
HANSEATIC 40741, 40790
HARMAN/KARDON
40702
HCM 40788
HDT 40705
HENSS 40713
HIMAX 40843
HITACHI 40573, 40664,
40713
HITEKER 40672
HOEHER 40651, 40713,
40831
HOME ELECTRONICS
40730
HOME TECH INDUSTRIES
41107, 41451
HOYO 40665
HYUNDAI 40766, 40850,
41228
INGELEN 40788
INTEGRA 40627
ISP 40695
JATON 40665
JBL 40702
JDB 40730
JDV 41367
JMB 40695
JVC 40503, 40539,
40558, 40623,
40867
KANSAI 41107
KANSAS TECHNOLOGIES
41233
KAWASAKI 40790
KENDO 40713, 40831
KENNEX 40713, 40770,
40898
KENWOOD 40490, 40534
KIIRO 40770
KINGAVON 40818
KISS 40665, 40841,
41523
KLH 40790, 41020
KOSS 40651
KXD 40857
LAWSON 40768
LENCO 40651, 40713,
40770, 41165
LEXIA 40768
LG 40591, 40741,
40790, 40801,
40869
LIFETEC 40651, 40831
LIMIT 40768
LITEON 41058
LODOS 40713
LOEWE 40511, 40539,
40741
LOGIX 40705
LUKER 41367
LUMATRON 40695, 40705,
40741, 40833,
41115
LUNATRON 40741
LUXMAN 40573
LUXOR 40713, 41004
MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539,
40675, 40713,
41140
MAGNEX 40723, 41165
MAJESTIC 41107
MANHATTAN 40705, 40713
MARANTZ 40539
MARK 40713
MARQUANT 40770
MATSUI 40651, 40672,
40695, 40713,
41004
MAXIM 40713, 40872
MBO 40730
MDS 40713
MECOTEK 40770
MEDION 40630, 40651,
40831, 40879,
41107, 41345
MEI 40790
MEMOREX 40695, 40831
METZ 40525, 40571,
40713
MICO 40723, 40751,
41223
MICROBOSS 40718
MICROMEDIA 40503, 40539
MICROMEGA 40539
MICROSOFT 40522
MICROSTAR 40831
MINAX 40713
MINERVA 40705
MINOKA 40770
MINOWA 41165
MIRROR 40879
MITSUBISHI 40713, 41521
MIZUDA 40770, 40818
MONYKA 40665
MPX 40843
MTLOGIC 41265
MUSTEK 40730
MX ONDA 40651, 40751,
41223
NAD 40741
NAIKO 40770, 41004,
41367
NEC 40785, 40869
NEOVIA 41271
NEUFUNK 40665
NEVIR 40770, 40831,
41197
NORCENT 40872, 41107,
41265
NORDMENDE 40831
NU-TEC 41228
OLIDATA 40672
ONKYO 40503, 40627,
40792
OPTIM 40843
OPTIMUS 40525
ORAVA 40818
ORBIT 40872
ORION 40695, 41006,
41128, 41233
ORITRON 40651
ORMOND 40713
P&B 40818, 41451
PACIFIC 40695, 40713,
40759, 40768,
40790, 40804,
40831
PACKARD BELL
40831
PALLADIUM 40695, 40779
PALSONIC 40672, 40852
PANASONIC 40490, 41282
PARAMOUNT PICTURES
40779
PEEKTON 40898
PHILCO 40788
PHILIPS 40503, 40539,
40675
PHILO 41345
PHONOTREND41165
PIONEER 40525, 40571,
41571
PLAYGO 41265
PLU2 40850, 41090
POLAROID 41020
POLK AUDIO 40539
PORTLAND 40770
POWERPOINT 40872
PRIMA 40766
PRIMA ELECTRONIC
40766
PRINZ 40831
PRISM 40705, 41006
PRO2 41107, 41345
PROLINE 40651, 40672,
40833, 41004
PROSCAN 40522
PROSON 40713
QWESTAR 40651
RADIONETTE 40741, 40869
RAITE 40665
RCA 40522, 40571,
40790
REC 40490, 40766
RED STAR 40759, 40763,
40770, 40788,
40898, 41107,
41345
REDSTAR 40763, 40898
REOC 40768
REVOY 40841
RIO 40869
ROADSTAR 40713, 40730,
40818, 40833,
40879, 40898,
41006
RONIN 40872
ROTEL 40558, 40623
ROWA 40516, 40872,
41004
SABA 40651
SAIVOD 40759, 40831,
41367
SALORA 40741
SAMSUNG 40490, 40573,
40744, 41075
SANSUI 40695, 40751,
40768
SANTOSH 41115
SANYO 40670, 40695,
40713, 40873
SCAN 40705, 40850
SCANMAGIC 40730
SCHAUB LORENZ
40770, 40788,
41115, 41151
SCHNEIDER 40539, 40651,
40705, 40713,
40779, 40788,
40790, 40804,
40831
SCIENTIFIC LABS
40768
SCOTT 40651, 40672,
40718, 41005,
41036, 41233
SEG 40665, 40713,
40763, 40768,
40872
SHANGHAI 40672
SHARP 40630, 40675,
40713, 41256
SHERWOOD 40741, 40770
SHINSONIC 40533
SILVA 40788, 40898
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page x Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
APPENDIX-xi
SILVA SCHNEIDER
40831, 40898
SINGER 40751
SKANTIC 40539, 40713
SKYMASTER 40730, 40768
SKYWORTH 40766, 40898
SLIDING 41115
SM ELECTRONIC
40730, 40768
SMART 40705, 40713,
40718
SONIC BLUE 40869
SONY 40533, 40573,
40772, 40864,
41033, 41633
SOUND COLOR
41233
SOUNDMASTER
40768
STANDARD 40651, 40768,
40788, 40831,
40898
STARLOGIC 41005
STARMEDIA 40818, 41005
STEVISON 41367
STRONG 40713
SUNKAI 40770, 40850
SUNSTECH 40831
SUNWOOD 40788, 40898
SUPERVISION 40768
SVA 40672
SYLVANIA 40675
SYMPHONIC 40675
SYNN 40768
TANDBERG 40713
TATUNG 40770
TEAC 40516, 40571,
40695, 40741,
40759, 40768,
40790, 40809,
40833, 41006,
41197, 41483
TEC 40898
TECHNICS 40490
TECHNIKA 40770, 40831,
41115, 41165
TECHNISSON 41115
TECHNOSONIC
40730, 41115
TECHWOOD 40713
TEDELEX 41228
TELETECH 40713, 40768
TENSAI 40651, 40770
TEVION 40651, 40833,
40898, 41036,
41170, 41382
THETA DIGITAL
40571
THOMSON 40522
TOKAI 40665, 40788,
40790, 40898
TOM-TEC 41450
TOSHIBA 40503, 40695
TRANS-CONTINENTS
40831, 40872,
41165, 41327
TREDEX 40804, 40843
TRUVISION 40857
UMAX 41151
UNITED 40672, 40695,
40788, 41115,
41165, 41228
UNIVERSUM 40591, 40713,
40741, 40779,
40790, 40869
UPTEK 40763
UPXUS 41345
URBAN CONCEPTS
40503
VENTURER 40790
VESTEL 40713
VIETA 40705, 41265
VIEWMASTER40862
VOXSON 40730, 40831
VTREK 41228
WAITEC 41151
WELKIN 40831
WELLINGTON 40713
WELTSTAR 40713
WHARFEDALE
40751, 40790
WILSON 40831, 41233
WINDSOR 40713
WINDY SAM 40573
WOXTER 41005, 41151
XBOX 40522
XENIUS 40790
XLOGIC 40768
XMS 40770
XORO 41183
YAKUMO 41004
YAMADA 40872, 41004,
41151
YAMAHA 40490, 40539,
41282, 41543
YAMAKAWA 40665, 40872
YUKAI 40730
ZENITH 40503, 40591,
40741, 40869
ZENNOX 41265
ZOECE 41265
LD PLAYER
AIWA 40203
CARVER 40064, 40194
DENON 40059
FUNAI 40203
HARMAN/KARDON
40194
HITACHI 40395
KENWOOD 40258
MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217
MARANTZ 40064, 40194
MITSUBISHI 40059
NAD 40059
NAGSMI 40059
OPTIMUS 40059
PANASONIC 40204
PHILIPS 40064, 40194
PIONEER 40059
POLK AUDIO 40194
QUASAR 40204
REALISTIC 40203
SALORA 40064
SHARP 40001
SONY 40193, 40201
TECHNICS 40204
TELEFUNKEN 40059
THETA DIGITAL
40194
VICTOR 40245
WARDS 40059
YAMAHA 40217
DVD RECORDER
APEX DIGITAL51056
BOGHE 51221
DENON 50490
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
51730
DIGITREX 51056
DSE 51730
ELTAX 51321
FUNAI 50675
GATEWAY 51158
GO VIDEO 50741, 51158,
51730
H & B 51235, 51421
HITACHI 51664
JVC 51164, 51275
KREISEN 51421
LG 50741
LITEON 51158, 51416,
51440, 51456
LOEWE 50741
MAGNAVOX 50646
MEDION 51347
MICO 51221
MITSUBISHI 51403
MUSTEK 51730
NEC 51404
PANASONIC 50490, 51010,
51011
PHILIPS 50646, 51158,
51818
PIONEER 50631, 51475,
51476
RCA 50522
RELISYS 51347
SAMSUNG 50490
SENSORY SCIENCE51158
SHARP 50630, 50675,
51419, 51550,
51556
SINUDYNE 51221
SONY 51033, 51069,
51070, 51433
SYLVANIA 50675
TANGENT 51321
TEVION 51227
THOMSON 50551
TOSHIBA 51510
VICTOR 51275
XORO 51221
YAMADA 51056, 51158,
51416
YAMAHA 51544
ZENITH 50741
CD PLAYER
ADC 60018
ADCOM 60234
ADVANTAGE 60032
AIWA 60157
AKAI 60156, 60362,
60643
ALTO 60625
ANAM 60362
ARCAM 60157
ARISTON 60625
AUDIO DYNAMICS
60018
AUDIO RESEARCH
60157
AUDIOLAB 60157
AUDIOMECA 60157
AUDIOTON 60157
BUSH 60643
CAIRN 60157
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
60029, 60303
CAMBRIDGE 60157, 60625
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
60625
CARVER 60157, 60179,
60299
CCE 60643
COPLAND 60393
CYRUS 60157
DENON 60003, 60034,
60626
DKK 60000
DMX ELECTRONICS
60157
DUAL 60003
ECLIPSE 60625
EROICA 60481
FIDELITY 60625
FISHER 60179
GARRARD 60393, 60643
GEMINI 60625
GENEXXA 60032, 60426
GOLDMUND 60157
GOLDSTAR 60643
GOODMANS 60362, 60625
GRUNDIG 60157
GTX 60362
HARMAN/KARDON
60157, 60173,
60426
HCM 60625
HIRO 60625
HITACHI 60032
INTEGRA 60101
KENWOOD 60028, 60157,
60190, 60626
KRELL 60157
KYOCERA 60018
LINN 60157
LG 71208
LOEWE 60157
LUXMAN 60093
MAGNAVOX 60157
MARANTZ 60029, 60157,
60626
MATSUI 60157, 60643
MCS 60029
MEMOREX 60032
MERIDIAN 60157
MICROMEGA 60157
MIRO 60000
MISSION 60157
MITSUBISHI 60156
MTC 60625
MUSICAL FIDELITY
60393
MYRYAD 60157
NAD 60000, 60299,
60721
NAGAOKA 60018
NAIM 60157
NAKAMICHI 60147
NEC 60234
NIKKO 60362, 60625
NSM 60157
ONKYO 60101, 61327
OPTIMUS 60000, 60032,
60179, 60426
ORION 60393
PANASONIC 60029, 60303
PHILIPS 60157, 60626
PINK TRIANGLE
60625
PIONEER 60032, 60101
POLK AUDIO 60157
PROTON 60157
QED 60157
01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page xi Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
RX-V659
Printed in Malaysia WG73810
RX-V659
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
G
QUAD 60157
QUASAR 60029
RADIOLA 60157
RADIOTONE 60625
RCA 60032, 60179
REALISTIC 60179
RESTEK 60157
REVOX 60157
ROTEL 60157, 60897
SAE 60157
SAMSUNG 60524
SANSUI 60157, 60625
SANYO 60179
SEG 60625
SHARP 60034
SHERWOOD 60426
SIEMENS 60157, 60362
SIMAUDIO 60157
SONIC FRONTIERS
60157
SONY 60000
STS 60018
SUPERTECH 60625
SYNERGY 60625
TAG MCLAREN
60157
TANDY 60032
TEAC 60362, 60393,
60625, 60643
TECHNICS 60029, 60207,
60303
TECHWOOD 60362
THORENS 60157
THULE AUDIO60157
TOSHIBA 60299, 60481
TRAXDATA 60626
UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362,
60524
WARDS 60000, 60032,
60157, 60179
YAMAHA 60036, 61907
YBA 60625
CD RECORDER
DENON 70626, 70766
HHB 70192
JVC 71294
KENWOOD 70626
LG 71208
MARANTZ 70626
NAD 71208
PHILIPS 70626
PIONEER 70192, 71087
RCA 70420
SONY 70000
TDK 71208
TEAC 70420
VICTOR 70072, 71294
YAMAHA 70888, 71292
MD RECORDER
DENON 70873
KENWOOD 70681
OPTIMUS 71063
PIONEER 71063
SHARP 70861, 71684
SONY 70490
TECHNICS 71078
YAMAHA 70490, 70888,
71909
TAPE DECK
AIWA 70029, 70197
AKAI 70189, 70283
ARCAM 70076
CARVER 70029
DENON 70076
EROICA 70189
GARRARD 70308, 70309
GRUNDIG 70029
HARMAN/KARDON
70029
INKEL 70070
JVC 70244, 70273
KENWOOD 70070, 70205
MAGNAVOX 70029
MARANTZ 70029
MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283
MYRYAD 70029
ONKYO 70135, 70282
OPTIMUS 70027, 70220
ORION 70308, 70309
PANASONIC 70229
PHILIPS 70029, 70229
PIONEER 70027, 70220
POLK AUDIO 70029
RADIOLA 70029
RCA 70027, 70220
REVOX 70029
SANSUI 70029
SHARP 70205, 70231
SONY 70170, 70243
TEAC 70283, 70289,
70308, 70309
TECHNICS 70229
THORENS 70029
VICTOR 70244, 70273
WARDS 70027, 70029
YAMAHA 70097, 70205,
70524
TUNER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
81467
AIWA 80158, 80189
AKAI 80115, 80609
ANAM 80281, 80609
ARCAM 80189
CAIRN 80189
CAMBRIDGE 80189
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
81455, 81647
CARVER 80189
DENON 80004, 80273
DUAL 80004
GARRARD 80281
GOLDMUND 80189
GOLDSTAR 80281
GOODMANS 80609
GRADIENTE 80281
GRUNDIG 80189, 80281
HARMAN/KARDON
80110, 80189
INKEL 80027, 80066
JBL 80110
JVC 80074
KENWOOD 80027, 80645
LG 80281
LINN 80189
LOEWE 80189
MAGNAVOX 80189
MARANTZ 80189
MEMOREX 80014
MICROMEGA 80189
MUSICAL FIDELITY
80445
MYRYAD 80189
NAD 80320, 80609
NIKKO 80609
ONKYO 80103, 80119
PANASONIC 80309, 80518
PHILIPS 80189
PIONEER 80014
POLK AUDIO 80189
RADIOLA 80189
RESTEK 80189
REVOX 80140, 80189
SANSUI 80189, 80609
SHERWOOD 80066
SIEMENS 80609
SONIC 80281
SONY 80158
SOUNDWAVE 80609
TEAC 80110, 80609
TECHNICS 80309, 80518,
81135
TECHWOOD 80281, 80609
THORENS 80189
UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281,
80609
VICTOR 80074
WARDS 80014, 80158,
80189
YAMAHA 80293, 81908
(TUNER ID1) 81916
(TUNER ID2) 81917
ZENITH 80281
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
YAMAHA (iPod) 81981
RX-V659_G_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, December 7, 2005 11:09 AM
Documenttranscriptie
RX-V659_G_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, December 7, 2005 11:09 AM G CD RECORDER DENON HHB 70626, 70766 70192 JVC KENWOOD LG MARANTZ NAD PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SONY TDK TEAC VICTOR YAMAHA 71294 70626 71208 70626 71208 70626 70192, 71087 70420 70000 71208 70420 70072, 71294 70888, 71292 MD RECORDER DENON KENWOOD OPTIMUS PIONEER SHARP SONY TECHNICS YAMAHA 70873 70681 71063 71063 70861, 71684 70490 71078 70490, 70888, 71909 TAPE DECK AIWA 70029, 70197 AKAI 70189, 70283 ARCAM 70076 CARVER 70029 DENON 70076 EROICA 70189 GARRARD 70308, 70309 GRUNDIG 70029 HARMAN/KARDON 70029 INKEL 70070 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070, 70205 MAGNAVOX 70029 MARANTZ 70029 MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283 MYRYAD 70029 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027, 70220 ORION PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER POLK AUDIO RADIOLA RCA REVOX SANSUI SHARP SONY TEAC TECHNICS THORENS VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 70308, 70309 70229 70029, 70229 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70205, 70231 70170, 70243 70283, 70289, 70308, 70309 70229 70029 70244, 70273 70027, 70029 70097, 70205, 70524 TUNER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 81467 AIWA 80158, 80189 AKAI 80115, 80609 ANAM 80281, 80609 ARCAM 80189 CAIRN 80189 CAMBRIDGE 80189 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 81455, 81647 CARVER 80189 DENON 80004, 80273 DUAL 80004 GARRARD 80281 GOLDMUND 80189 GOLDSTAR 80281 GOODMANS 80609 GRADIENTE 80281 GRUNDIG 80189, 80281 HARMAN/KARDON 80110, 80189 INKEL 80027, 80066 JBL 80110 JVC 80074 KENWOOD 80027, 80645 © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA LG 80281 LINN 80189 LOEWE 80189 MAGNAVOX 80189 MARANTZ 80189 MEMOREX 80014 MICROMEGA 80189 MUSICAL FIDELITY 80445 MYRYAD 80189 NAD 80320, 80609 NIKKO 80609 ONKYO 80103, 80119 PANASONIC 80309, 80518 PHILIPS 80189 PIONEER 80014 POLK AUDIO 80189 RADIOLA 80189 RESTEK 80189 REVOX 80140, 80189 SANSUI 80189, 80609 SHERWOOD 80066 SIEMENS 80609 SONIC 80281 SONY 80158 SOUNDWAVE 80609 TEAC 80110, 80609 TECHNICS 80309, 80518, 81135 TECHWOOD 80281, 80609 THORENS 80189 UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281, 80609 VICTOR 80074 WARDS 80014, 80158, 80189 YAMAHA 80293, 81908 (TUNER ID1) 81916 (TUNER ID2) 81917 ZENITH 80281 RX-V659 QUAD 60157 QUASAR 60029 RADIOLA 60157 RADIOTONE 60625 RCA 60032, 60179 REALISTIC 60179 RESTEK 60157 REVOX 60157 ROTEL 60157, 60897 SAE 60157 SAMSUNG 60524 SANSUI 60157, 60625 SANYO 60179 SEG 60625 SHARP 60034 SHERWOOD 60426 SIEMENS 60157, 60362 SIMAUDIO 60157 SONIC FRONTIERS 60157 SONY 60000 STS 60018 SUPERTECH 60625 SYNERGY 60625 TAG MCLAREN 60157 TANDY 60032 TEAC 60362, 60393, 60625, 60643 TECHNICS 60029, 60207, 60303 TECHWOOD 60362 THORENS 60157 THULE AUDIO60157 TOSHIBA 60299, 60481 TRAXDATA 60626 UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362, 60524 WARDS 60000, 60032, 60157, 60179 YAMAHA 60036, 61907 YBA 60625 RX-V659 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 81981 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WG73810 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power cable plug can be reached easily. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 19 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet. VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CONTENTS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12 Connecting the optimizer microphone..................... 32 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 33 PLAYBACK.......................................................... 38 USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 40 USING VIDEO FEATURES ............................... 46 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................63 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 63 Sound field program descriptions............................ 64 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 66 Sound field program speaker layouts ...................... 72 ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU ............................................................76 Using SET MENU................................................... 78 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 79 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 85 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 87 ADVANCED SETUP ............................................90 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................92 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ............................................ 92 Setting the remote control code ............................... 94 Setting library codes ................................................ 95 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 96 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION .....97 Connecting Zone 2................................................... 97 Controlling Zone 2................................................... 99 USING iPod® .......................................................101 Setting the remote control code ............................. 101 Controlling iPod .................................................... 101 RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................103 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................104 GLOSSARY.........................................................111 Audio information ................................................. 111 Video information.................................................. 112 Sound field program information .......................... 113 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................114 English Displaying the input source information ................. 46 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 47 Playing video sources in the background ................ 47 Selecting the Radio Data System program .............. 59 Using the Radio Data System station network ........ 60 Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 61 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 40 Muting the audio output........................................... 40 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 40 Selecting the input mode ......................................... 41 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 41 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 42 Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode .................................................... 43 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 44 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo............................................... 45 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 45 Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 45 RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)........59 ADVANCED OPERATION BASIC OPERATION Automatic tuning ..................................................... 52 Manual tuning.......................................................... 53 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 54 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 55 Selecting preset stations........................................... 56 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 57 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32 RECORDING........................................................51 FM/AM TUNING..................................................52 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers....................................................... 12 Connecting speakers ................................................ 13 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 17 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 18 Connecting a TV...................................................... 19 Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB................................................. 20 Connecting a CD player, an MD player, a tape deck or a turntable..................................... 23 Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 24 Connecting an external amplifier............................. 25 Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder ......................................... 26 Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player .................................... 27 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 28 Connecting the power cable..................................... 29 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 30 Turning on and off the power .................................. 31 Enjoying multi-channel sources in surround ........... 48 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 49 Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 50 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .....................48 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 100 W + 100 W Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W + 100 W Surround back: 100 W + 100 W ◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi stereo sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal) controlling capability ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2 using ZONE CONTROL ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/ 24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) Radio Data System (U.K. and Europe models only) ◆ Radio Data System tuning capability iPod controlling capability ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini Notes • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. iPod® Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved. 2 “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control CODE SET Batteries (2) (AA, R6, UM-3) AM loop antenna (except for U.K. model) Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia and General models) Indoor FM antenna (Europe, Australia and Korea models) TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD Optimizer microphone SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 PHONO AMP SOURCE TV STEREO 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START EON Installing batteries in the remote control 1 Notes 3 2 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. English 1 • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use an old battery together with a new one. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 0 A 8 9 B VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE NEXT LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA C D EF G H I 1 MASTER ON/OFF Turns on or off this unit (see page 31). 2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode (see page 31). Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 3 OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied optimizer microphone in the “AUTO SETUP” procedure (see page 32). 4 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8). 4 J K L M N 5 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 9). 6 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT • Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 52). • Selects the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 42). 7 PRESET/TUNING l / h, LEVEL +/– • Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 52). • Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 52). • Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 42). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 52). 0 ZONE 2 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode (see page 99). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. A ZONE CONTROL Switches the zone you want to control between the main zone and Zone 2 (see page 99). y When Zone 2 is selected, the ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation. B VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. y This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. C PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones (see page 40). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. D SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. E PRESET/TUNING, EDIT • Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and selecting the tuning frequency. • Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 57). G FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 52). H PROGRAM selector Selects sound field programs or adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see page 39). I TONE CONTROL Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right, center, presence left and right and subwoofer channels in conjunction with the PROGRAM selector (see page 39). INTRODUCTION 8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 54). J INPUT MODE Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the corresponding input signals when one component is connected via both digital and analog connections (see page 41). K INPUT selector Selects the desired input source. L MULTI CH INPUT Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 44). Note The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). M PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 45). N VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console or a video camera (see page 27). y To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. English F STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 45). 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 92. Note The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the component selector switch position. Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 2 0 CODE SET A TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER B MD SLEEP 3 DVD C MULTI CH IN CBL DTV D TUNER PHONO V-AUX VCR DVR AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME E F TV 4 5 6 7 G TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND 8 H I J ENTER A/B/C/D/E 9 RETURN DISPLAY ON SCREEN K REC AUDIO DISC SKIP FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START EON L ■ Controlling this unit Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate (see page 8). 2 CODE SET Use to set up remote control codes (see page 94). 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source you want to control. Note The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the remote control, showing which source component is currently being operated. 4 Sound field program selector buttons Select sound field programs (see page 63). – Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in surround (see page 49). – Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources (see page 48). – Use PURE DIRECT to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 45). 5 SPEAKERS Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this button repeatedly to toggle as follows: A on B on A and B off 6 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 43). 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the output level (see page 42). 6 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS G MUTE Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 40). 9 RETURN Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters. H STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 45). 0 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. A STANDBY Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 31). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. B POWER Turns on this unit (see page 31). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. C SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 41). D MULTI CH IN Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external decoder, etc. (see page 44). E VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. F Component selector switch Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area. INTRODUCTION 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or the “SET MENU” parameters. I NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 40). J SET MENU Enters “SET MENU” (see page 78). K ON SCREEN Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor (see page 47). L Radio Data System tuning buttons (U.K. and Europe models only) FREQ/TEXT Switches the Radio Data System display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers the corresponding data services) and the frequency display (see page 61). PTY SEEK MODE Sets this unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 59). PTY SEEK START Starts searching for a station once the desired program type is selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 59). EON Selects a program type (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT) for automatic tuning (see page 60). AMP Operates this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 93). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 92). Notes English • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 94. • When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and PHONO (see page 94), priority is given to the one set for DTV/ CBL. 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ■ Controlling the TUNER functions ■ Using the remote control Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 4 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations. 7 BAND Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see page 52). VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8) (see page 56). OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM PRESET/TUNING EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 30 30 CODE SET POWER Approximately 6 m TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV V-AUX DVR VCR TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN TUNER PHONO AMP SOURCE TV STEREO 1 STANDARD 2 3 SELECT MOVIE 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START EON Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 8 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display t 6 7 8 9 0 A B DOCK VIRTUAL STANDARD SP SILENT CINEMA A B ZONE2 NIGHT pPHONO VOLUME YPAO AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY HiFi DSP PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP dB MUTE 96/24 LFE ft q DIGITAL q PL x q PL D C pVCR pDVR pV-AUX pDTV/CBL pDVD pMD/CD-R pTUNER pCD 96 24 MATRIX DISCRETE ENHANCER q EX 5 INTRODUCTION 2 3 4 1 q PL mS dB PCM E F G H I J K L L C R SL SB SR M N O R P Q (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. 7 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 40). 2 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (see page 43). 8 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 64). 3 Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. 9 YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 32). Presence DSP sound field Listening position Surround left DSP sound field Surround right DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 4 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 50). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 6 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 24). 0 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode (see page 52). A TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station (see page 52). B STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit (see page 52). C MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 54). D VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. E PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. English 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS F STANDARD indicator Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR. ENHANCED” program is selected (see page 49). G SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. H Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 40). I ZONE2 indicator Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 99). J NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 40). K HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 64). L Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. M SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 41). N MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 40). O 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. P Input channel and speaker indicators Presence speaker indicator L C R SL SB SR Input channel indicator Surround back speaker indicator Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. Presence and surround back speaker indicators Light up according to the number of presence and surround back speakers set for “PRESENCE SP” (see page 80) and “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 80) in “SOUND MENU” when “TEST” in “SOUND MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 83). y You can make settings for the presence and surround back speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for “PRESENCE SP” (see page 80) and “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 80) in “SOUND MENU”. 10 Q LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. R Radio Data System indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) Lights up when the Radio Data System data is being received. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 INTRODUCTION 2 1 TUNER AUDIO AUDIO 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT COMPONENT VIDEO DOCK GND AM ANT PHONO Y GND PB PR DVD REMOTE VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R IN DVD FRONT SURROUND CENTER SURROUND BACK SINGLE DVR IN PRESENCE/ZONE2 PRE OUT CD OPTICAL CONTROL +12V OUT 15mA MAX. OUT DTV/ CBL DTV/ CBL (PLAY) MD/ CD-R MD/CD-R OUT IN (REC) DVR SUBWOOFER MONITOR OUT DVD FRONT SPEAKERS OUT A SURROUND DTV/CBL IN SURROUND VCR SURROUND BACK OUT CD B DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT 0 A FRONT SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUTPUT B C CENTER SURROUND BACK S VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT E D 1 Audio component jacks See page 23 for connection information. 2 DOCK terminal Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be stationed. See page 24 for connection information. 3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See pages 19 and 20 for connection information. 4 REMOTE jacks See page 97 for details. 5 Antenna terminals See page 28 for connection information. 6 CONTROL OUT jack This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. 7 PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker terminals See page 15 for connection information. 8 PRE OUT jacks See page 25 for connection information. 9 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other audiovisual components. See page 29 for details. 0 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack See page 23 for connection information. A DIGITAL INPUT jacks See page 20 for connection information. B MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 26 for connection information. C ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks See page 97 for connection information. Note These jacks output analog signals only. D Video component jacks See pages 19 and 20 for connection information. E Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) See page 29 for details. English 11 CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R* speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). PL Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Place the center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. PR C FR FL 30˚ SL SR Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m above the floor. 60˚ 80˚ SL SBL SR SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as that of the front speakers. PR FR PL SW FL SR SBR C Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. SBL SL 1.8 m Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 64). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intent to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m outside the front speakers, facing slightly inward, and about 1.8 m above the floor. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for hi-fi stereo sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 12 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION Notes • A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. • The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 79 and 80) are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81). • You can use the PRESENCE/ZONE2 terminals to connect the Zone 2 speakers (see page 98). Subwoofer Presence speakers Right Left 2 1 3 PREPARATION • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 31). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 30). Surround speakers Right Left 4 5 PRESENCE/ZONE2 PRE OUT SUBWOOFER SPEAKERS A SURROUND B FRONT 6 7 Front speakers (B) CENTER 8 SURROUND BACK 10 9 Center speaker English Surround back speakers Right Left Front speakers (A) Right Left 13 CONNECTIONS FRONT terminals Connect one or two front speaker systems (6, 7) to these terminals. If you use only one front speaker system, connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal. CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker (8) to these terminals. SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals. SURROUND BACK terminals Connect a surround back speakers (9, 10) to these terminals. PRESENCE/ZONE2 terminals Connect presence speakers (2, 3) to these terminals. SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (1) (such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System) to this jack. 14 Speaker layout 2 6 3 1 4 7 8 5 10 9 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting the speaker cable ■ Connecting to the PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker terminals 1 Connect presence speakers to these terminals. Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. y You can also use these terminals to connect the Zone 2 speakers (see page 97). 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. 3 Close the tab to secure the wire. 10 mm Loosen the knob. PREPARATION 2 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. English Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 15 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting the banana plug (except U.K., Europe and Asia models) The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. Banana plug y You can also use the banana plug with the PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker terminals. Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the side of each terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug. 1 Tighten the knob. 2 Insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. 16 CONNECTIONS Information on jacks and cable plugs Note You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right Coaxial analog audio digital audio cable plugs cable plug VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR PREPARATION DIGITAL AUDIO L Video jacks and cable plugs Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 87), the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks are converted and output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks interchangeably. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Note Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. English 17 CONNECTIONS Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC) Input Output AUDIO OUT (REC) DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL Digital audio DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL L R L R Analog audio AUDIO Digital output Analog output Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. ■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Output (MONITOR OUT) Input Y PB PR Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO Analog video S VIDEO VIDEO Through Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 87) Note When video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows where the video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks have the top priority: COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO 18 CONNECTIONS Connecting a TV Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR MONITOR OUT S VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT S Y V Video in PB PR Component video in S-video in TV English 19 CONNECTIONS Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 19). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 87), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 19). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 87), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 85). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. ■ Connecting a DVD player R L S V AUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO Y DVD VIDEO DVD DVD DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT 20 Y Video out O S-video out C Audio out Component video out Optical audio out Coaxial audio out DVD player PB PR PB PR CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a DVD recorder COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR VIDEO DVR IN DVR OUT S V V Video out S Video in L S-video out R S-video in L Audio in Audio out PREPARATION R Y PB PR Component video out DVD recorder ■ Connecting a VCR VIDEO IN VCR S S V V Video out L Video in R S-video out L S-video in R Audio in Audio out OUT English VCR 21 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting an STB Cable TV receiver or satellite receiver L S V Y Video out R S-video out O Audio out Optical audio out Component video out COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO OPTICAL DTV/CBL DIGITAL INPUT 22 DTV/ CBL DTV/ CBL PB PR PB PR CONNECTIONS Connecting a CD player, an MD player, a tape deck or a turntable Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes CD player Turntable PREPARATION • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 85). • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some turntables. • The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier. Coaxial audio out Audio out GND C R L R Audio out AUDIO L AUDIO PHONO GND DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R CD IN OPTICAL (PLAY) MD/ CD-R OUT MD/CD-R (REC) CD R O O Optical audio in Optical audio out DIGITAL INPUT Audio in L R L Audio out MD recorder or tape deck English 23 CONNECTIONS Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the YAMAHA iPod universal dock. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK terminal of this unit. • Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 108. • Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. • Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod. iPod YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) DOCK 24 CONNECTIONS Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes Surround channel amplifier Front channel amplifier Front in R Surround back channel amplifier Surround back in Surround in L R PREPARATION • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. • Set the volume level of the external amplifiers connected to the PRE OUT jacks to the maximum. • The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 39). • If SPEAKERS A is turned off (see page 38) and “SP B” is set to “ZONE B” (see page 89), signals are output only at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level with the supplied remote control (see page 42). • Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 79) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81). • To use the external amplifiers in Zone 2, select “EXT” in “ZONE2 AMP” (see page 89). For details. see “Using the external amplifier” on page 98. L R L PRE OUT FRONT SURROUND CENTER SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER Center in English Center channel amplifier Subwoofer in Subwoofer 25 CONNECTIONS Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 44), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, signals are output only from the front left and right channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input FRONT FRONT SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SUB WOOFER CENTER Multi-format player or external decoder 26 Multi-format player or external decoder L R L R Surround out Surround back out R Center out L Front out R Surround out L Center out R Subwoofer out Front out L CENTER MULTI CH INPUT Subwoofer out SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT CONNECTIONS Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. PREPARATION VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E EDIT ON NEXT LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O Optical audio out L Audio out L/R VIDEO Video out S-video out VIDEO AUX S VIDEO Game console or video camera English 27 CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. 2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT terminal. 4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back into place. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the other lead wire to the GND terminal. Notes • Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 91). • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. Indoor FM antenna (supplied except for U.K. model) AM loop antenna (supplied except for U.K. model) TUNER 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT GND AM ANT Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m of vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 28 Set up the AM loop antenna. y Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you tune into AM stations (see page 52). CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. (U.S.A. model) To the AC wall outlet AC OUTLETS SWITCHED PREPARATION ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) CAUTION The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V Voltage indication ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet Korea model ............................................................... None Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when MASTER ON/ OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to the OFF position. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 114. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. English 29 CONNECTIONS Setting the speaker impedance CAUTION 4 If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT 2,5 EFFECT VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E EDIT ON NEXT MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA SP IMP.-6 MIN 2,4 3 1 2 5 Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 31 for details about turning on or off this unit. MASTER STRAIGHT EFFECT ON OFF Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “SP IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM SP IMP.-8 MIN 30 MASTER ON Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. While holding down 3 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. OFF Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. CONNECTIONS Turning on and off the power When all connections are complete, turn on this unit. MASTER ON/OFF CODE SET STANDBY TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER POWER VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL EDIT ON MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR TV VOL TV CH VOLUME PHONO OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL AMP PREPARATION EFFECT SILENT CINEMA SOURCE TV MAIN ZONE ON/OFF ■ Turning on this unit ■ Turning off this unit Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. MASTER MASTER ON OFF Front panel ON • Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main zone to the standby mode. OFF Front panel MAIN ZONE STANDBY ON/OFF or Front panel Remote control • Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main zone. MAIN ZONE POWER ON/OFF Front panel or Remote control Note MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. English 31 AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP This unit employs the YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. Speaker wiring WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. Parametric equalizer EQ Adjusts the frequency and the parametric equalizer level of each channel to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands of sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. In addition, the frequency response of each channel is adjusted in accordance with the sound output from your front speakers. Volume level LEVEL Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Notes • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • If the “AUTO SETUP” procedure stops and an error or warning message appears on your video monitor, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 109 for appropriate remedies. • After you have completed the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. Connecting the optimizer microphone Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel and place it in a suitable location in your listening room. y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 2 Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC 32 TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL AUTO SETUP Using AUTO SETUP 1 Once you have connected the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel and have placed it in a suitable location in your listening room, run “AUTO SETUP” in the OSD or in the front panel display. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. AMP SET MENU SOURCE Note MENU TV To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. y 2 PRESET/CH SET MENU [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p A/B/C/D/E p MAX Press ENTER to enter “AUTO SETUP”. The “AUTO:MENU” display appears in the OSD. MAX MIN PRESET/CH Subwoofer 1 AUTO:MENU .SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO START AV STEREO MD CD .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO ENTER 3 TV Press u / d to select “AUTO SETUP”. CROSSOVER HIGH CUT VOLUME MIN p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure and an error or warning message appears in the OSD or in the front panel display, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on pages 109 and 110 for a complete list of error and warning messages and proper remedies. • The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold. • If the volume level and the crossover frequency of your subwoofer can be adjusted, set the volume level to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. PREPARATION SET MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO SLEEP MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 MULTI CH IN CBL 2 SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENTER DTV TUNER DVR VCR Automatic processing of all items []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p DVD V-AUX A/B/C/D/E EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT PHONO 10 ENT. p 1 STANDARD CD-R EFFECT AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH 1 PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU BAND VOLUME TV ENTER A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN RETURN 1,11 2-10 DISPLAY ON SCREEN MOVIE REC English 33 AUTO SETUP The display changes as follows. 4 Press u / d to select “SETUP” and then press j / i to select the desired setting. PRESET/CH 1 AUTO:MENU SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO .START PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E 1 AUTO:CHECK INITIALIZING .WIRING SIZE/DISTANCE EQUALIZING LEVEL CHECK CH=CENTER |||||;;;;;;;; []: Exit p Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the previous settings. • Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and restore the previous settings. • Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP” parameters to the initial factory settings. RESULT:EXIT Note “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. Press d to select “START” and then press ENTER to start the setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker and “WAITING” appears in the OSD during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure. Once all items are set, the “RESULT:EXIT” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E p . WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 5 p p Automatic processing of all items []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows: Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level 34 AUTO SETUP 7 Notes Press j / i repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK PREPARATION • If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 4. • If you selected “RELOAD”, “UNDO” or “DEFAULT” in step 4, no test tones are output. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 37. • The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. For details, see “If a warning screen appears” on page 37. • Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 81) is automatically set to “REVERSE”. Results of the speaker connection and wiring [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return 6 Press d to select “RESULT” and then press ENTER to display the setup results in detail. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER RESULT:DISTANCE1 FRONT L;;;4.50m CENTER;;;;5.20m FRONT R;;;4.80m PRNS L;;;;5.20m PRNS R;;;;5.30m Results of the speaker distance from the listening position [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E RESULT:SIZE FRONT L;;;;;;LRG Results of the frequency response of each speaker RESULT:EXIT p p WARNING (3) . RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return RESULT:EQ CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB 2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB 3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB 4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB 5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB 6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB 7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return RESULT:WIRING RESULT:LEVEL1 FRONT L;;;;;;;OK FRONT L;;;+1.0dB CENTER;;;;-1.5dB FRONT R;;;+6.5dB PRNS L;;;;-9.0dB PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB Results of the parametric equalizer of each speaker Results of the speaker output level [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return English 35 AUTO SETUP y If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 76). 10 PRESET/CH Notes ENTER A/B/C/D/E p p Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET” and “CANCEL” and then press j / i to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. PRESET/CH RESULT:EXIT ENTER A/B/C/D/E p p WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB . >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. 36 ENTER [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter A/B/C/D/E 11 p RESULT:EXIT WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB . >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p Press ENTER to return to the top “RESULT:EXIT” display. PRESET/CH 9 SET MENU • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. • The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. 8 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU AUTO SETUP ■ If an error screen appears ■ If a warning screen appears Press u / d / j / i to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-9:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. Warning messages inform you of potential problems detected during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. ERROR E-9:USER CANCEL . Don't operate any function. Note Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 p p Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. PREPARATION . >RETRY EXIT []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. RESULT:EXIT p p . WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. 2 Press j / i repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. RESULT:EXIT p p . WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 109. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed instead. 3 Press ENTER to return to the top “RESULT:EXIT” display. PRESET/CH RESULT:EXIT ENTER A/B/C/D/E p p WARNING (3) RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 5.30m . LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB . >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter English 37 PLAYBACK PLAYBACK CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. 3 VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL EDIT ON MEMORY ZONE CONTROL Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MD PURE DIRECT MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R SLEEP INPUT OPTICAL EFFECT CD SILENT CINEMA CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL or 2 6,7 6 CODE SET STEREO TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY 3 2 MUSIC 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 SPEAKERS ENHANCER 9 0 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR 2 7 8 NIGHT STRAIGHT Front panel 7 EFFECT SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SOURCE VOLUME TV VCR Remote control Available input sources A/B/C/D/E TV CH DVR ENTER AMP TV VOL V-AUX The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for a few seconds. ENT. 10 PRESET/CH PHONO TUNER EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT SLEEP CD-R DTV PHONO 5 POWER MD CD 3 DVD 5 RETURN DISPLAY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER PHONO CD VOLUME SP A DVD 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the remote control repeatedly). Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the respective speakers are turned on or off. SPEAKERS A B Front panel or AMP SPEAKERS SOURCE 9 TV Remote control 38 Currently selected input source dB AUTO L R Currently selected input mode Note If you are to select an input source connected via digital connections, set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS” (see page 41). 4 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. See page 52 for details about tuning instructions. PLAYBACK 5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME or VOLUME 7 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. See page 64 for details about sound field programs. PROGRAM Remote control Front panel 6 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS” and then rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. Front panel or MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 BASIC OPERATION STEREO PROGRAM TONE CONTROL EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ENT. 10 EFFECT Remote control VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER PHONO CD VOLUME SP A TREBLE dB 0dB L VCR R • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 84), and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this unit. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when the Pure Direct mode (see page 45) is selected or when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 44). • To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, see page 48 for details. V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER PHONO CD VOLUME SP A TV Sports • Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency response. • Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response. Notes DVR dB L R Currently selected surround field program Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 44). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 46 for details. English 39 USING AUDIO FEATURES USING AUDIO FEATURES Using SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 64). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on the type of material you are playing. 1 Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 44). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 45) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 45) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 45). AMP NIGHT SOURCE Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output. y MUTE • You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 84). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. Note If you change the input source or the sound field program while the audio output is being muted, this unit resumes the audio output. 10 TV Muting the audio output y Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. 40 USING AUDIO FEATURES y AUTO “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes DTS • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the Pure Direct mode (see page 45) is selected. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 44). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. Selecting the input mode ANALOG Note When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is detected. Using the sleep timer This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. • We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the “INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 86). Notes Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 29). 1 • To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”. • DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on the player even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the desired input source. SLEEP MD CD BASIC OPERATION y 1 Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel to select the desired input source. INPUT 2 2 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. See page 52 for details about tuning instructions. Press INPUT MODE on the front panel repeatedly to select the desired input mode. INPUT MODE Available input sources VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER PHONO CD VOLUME SP A Currently selected input source AUTO R English DVD dB L Currently selected input mode 41 USING AUDIO FEATURES 3 Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 82). SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF SLEEP SLEEP 30min y 90min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A TUNER pCD AMP SOURCE TV VOL PHONO dB L TV CH VOLUME 1 TV VOLUME SLEEP SLEEP 120min This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output level. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT R 10 ENT. EFFECT 1 Flashes PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU BAND ENTER 3 A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY ON SCREEN REC VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD TUNER pCD MD/CD-R SP A AUDIO PHONO SLEEP STRAIGHT dB L R 1 Lights up 4 To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. AMP SOURCE LEVEL TV BAND TITLE SLEEP VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER pCD PHONO VOLUME SP A SLEEP OFF dB L R The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/ OFF on the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby mode. 42 2 DISC SKIP VOLUME USING AUDIO FEATURES • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker output level. • Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker output level. • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. B. R” to adjust the surround back right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. B. L” to adjust the surround back left speaker output level. • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker output level. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output level. • Select “PRES. R” to adjust the presence right speaker output level. • Select “PRES. L” to adjust the presence left speaker output level. • Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. • Instead of “SUR. B. R” and “SUR. B. L”, “SUR. B” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 80). 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing the improved performance of the overall sound system. Notes • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog 2channel input sources. • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with any of the sound field programs. • When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. • When the input source is changed to an incompatible input source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in 2-channel or 7-channel stereo. BASIC OPERATION y Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode y The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E 3 Press ENTER on the remote control when you have completed your adjustment. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E English 43 USING AUDIO FEATURES 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer mode. The following display is shown in the OSD and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display. AMP ENHANCER SOURCE 0 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 26) as the input source. Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display. TV MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control MUSIC ENHANCER 2ch Stereo . LOW >HIGH ENHANCER MULTI CH INPUT Lights up Choices: 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo, Off • Select “2ch Stereo” to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. • Select “7ch Stereo” to play back compression artifacts in 7.1-channel stereo. • Select “Off ” to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. Note When you select “Off ”, this unit returns to the previously selected sound field program. 2 Press j / i on the remote control to select the desired effect level. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. Note Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. 44 Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the front panel display. USING AUDIO FEATURES Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. AMP STEREO Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound The Pure Direct mode turns off the video circuitry and the front panel display, allowing sources to bypass the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and analog sources. Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press PURE DIRECT on the remote control) to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode. SOURCE 1 TV PURE DIRECT Front panel or 2ch Stereo AMP PURE DIRECT SOURCE • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 81). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. Enjoying unprocessed input sources When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STRAIGHT on the remote control to select “STRAIGHT”. AMP STRAIGHT SOURCE ENT. TV EFFECT STRAIGHT 2 8 BASIC OPERATION y TV Remote control Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 41), no sound will be output. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • The front panel display automatically dims. • The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for speaker level settings) – operating video functions (video conversion, etc.) • The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. y • The indicator around the PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. • The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. English To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press STRAIGHT on the remote control again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. y You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel. 45 USING VIDEO FEATURES USING VIDEO FEATURES Signal format FORMAT Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Display status: Analog, Digital, DolbyD, DTS, PCM, --- Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Note Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. “---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals. Sampling frequency SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. Display status: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, --- AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU TV Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling frequency. SET MENU Channel CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note 2 Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press ENTER. The following information about the input source appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH “---” appears when there is no source channel available. Bit rate BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. Note PRESET/CH “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate. ENTER ;SIGNAL INFO FORMAT PCM SAMPLING 48kHz CHANNEL 2/0/--BITRATE 2/0/--FLAG NONE [RETURN]:Exit 46 Flag FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E 3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU USING VIDEO FEATURES Selecting the OSD mode You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is to read the information in the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press DISPLAY on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the OSD modes. The OSD mode changes in the following order. AMP SOURCE ON SCREEN TV Full display You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is not video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 88). Notes • The OSD signal is not output at the DVR/VCR OUT jacks and will not be recorded. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 87) to display the OSD. • To display the OSD with the component video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, set the OSD mode to the full display mode. • When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “OFF” (see page 88), the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. Short display MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL Display off BASIC OPERATION DISPLAY y DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR Audio sources PHONO Full display Fully shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. Display off No information is displayed except for the “SET MENU” screen. P02 Video sources Note If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 44). MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Full display P02 MUSIC Pop/Rock Short display English 47 ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying multi-channel sources in surround If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback. Decoders You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the source you are playing. Decoder Functions Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals PLIIxMovie in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals PLIIxMusic in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. EX Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. AMP EXTD SUR. SOURCE 7 TV 2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed. Notes PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Auto AUTO When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/7.1 channels. 48 Off OFF Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels. • “PLIIxMovie” is available only when “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 80) is set to “SMLx2” or “LRGx2”. • Some 6.1/7.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing these kinds of discs in 6.1/7.1 channels, select a decoder manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD SUR. in the following cases: – when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 80) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 80) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 45) or Pure Direct (see page 45) mode is selected. • When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 80). ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to switch between the “SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED” programs or press MOVIE to select the “MOVIE THEATER” program. SUR. STANDARD Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game sources Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources STANDARD 5 AMP SOURCE or TV MOVIE 2 Press SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired decoder. SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE THEATER Functions BASIC OPERATION 4 SELECT PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources y PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel display. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources 6 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 80). English 49 ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Using Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 80), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 64). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 80) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 44). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the Pure Direct (see page 45) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 45) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 45). 50 RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. CAUTION The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes BASIC OPERATION • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 39), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 82) and the sound field programs (see page 64) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E EDIT ON NEXT MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the source component you want to record from. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA MD INPUT 2 CODE SET POWER TV AV CD CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL or DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO STANDBY POWER SLEEP DTV 1 Front panel MULTI CH IN CBL DVD SLEEP CD-R TRANSMIT POWER MD 2 CD Remote control TUNER PHONO V-AUX DVR VCR TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP SOURCE Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. 51 English 3 TV FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Automatic tuning 3 Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE VCR PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R DVR 1 DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER PHONO CD VOLUME AUTO TUNED SP A A 3 2 V-AUX OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 4 1 3 dB AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) L R Lights up If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. PRESET/TUNING INPUT EDIT 4 Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press l to tune into a lower frequency. FM/AM FM or AM l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER PHONO CD AUTO TUNED VOLUME SP A A dB AM 1530 kHz Lights up 52 L R FM/AM TUNING Manual tuning 3 If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. TUNING MODE Note AUTO/MAN'L Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED PHONO XM VOLUME SP A A VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE NEXT LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 3 2 AM 1440 kHz R No colon (:) OFF MAIN ZONE PHONES dB L 4 1 3 PRESET/TUNING BASIC OPERATION EDIT 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. INPUT 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM or AM English 53 FM/AM TUNING Automatic preset tuning 3 You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL Flash MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE NEXT LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE VCR PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R DVR OPTICAL V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER AUTO TUNED EFFECT CD PHONO MEMORY VOLUME SP A SILENT CINEMA A1:FM 87.50MHz 2 1 13 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. dB L R Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning options” on page 55. INPUT Notes Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM 54 • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 55. FM/AM TUNING ■ Automatic preset tuning options You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. Note Manual preset tuning You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on page 54. • Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all been stored up to E8. A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO 3 4 l PRESET/TUNING h EDIT LEVEL OPTICAL 1 2,5 Tune into a station automatically or manually. See pages 52 and 53 for tuning instructions. VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER PHONO CD VOLUME TUNED SP A PRESET/TUNING R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA A dB AM 630 kHz L R When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 BASIC OPERATION • Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT Flashes VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD PHONO MEMORY VOLUME SP A 630 kHz R English C :AM dB L Preset station Colon (:) group 55 FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press h to select a higher preset station number. • Press l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER Flashes OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E EDIT ON NEXT LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD PHONO MEMORY VOLUME SP A 630 kHz L Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. MEMORY R OPTICAL MUSIC V-AUX DTV/CBL MOVIE 3 4 2 SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU 1 MENU BAND ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY ON SCREEN 2 REC When performing this operation with the remote control, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER PHONO CD TUNED VOLUME SP A C3:AM ENTERTAIN 1 STANDARD y MAN'L/AUTO FM dB 630 kHz L R The displayed station has been stored as C3. 6 AUDIO 1 2 STEREO DVR L R Preset station number VCR VIDEO AUX VIDEO EFFECT SILENT CINEMA dB C3:AM 5 PURE DIRECT S VIDEO ON/OFF VCR Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other stations. 1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or A/B/C/D/E j / i on the remote control) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. PRESET/CH Notes A/B/C/D/E • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 56 or NEXT Front panel ENTER A/B/C/D/E Remote control FM/AM TUNING 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. PRESET/CH VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC l PRESET/TUNING h PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM or MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL INPUT MAIN ZONE ENTER PHONES LEVEL SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER R OPTICAL 1,3 1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 56. 2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. VOLUME dB L AUDIO R BASIC OPERATION E1:FM 87.50MHz 2,4 PHONO CD TUNED SP A L SILENT CINEMA Remote control Front panel VIDEO EFFECT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT Flashes VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD PHONO MEMORY VOLUME SP A E1:FM 87.50MHz dB L R Flashes English 57 FM/AM TUNING 3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 56. A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL Flashes VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD PHONO MEMORY VOLUME SP A dB A5:FM 90.60MHz L R Flashes 4 Press EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED PHONO CD VOLUME SP A EDIT 58 dB E1-A5 L R RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) Radio Data System (U.K. and Europe models only) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The Radio Data System function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. Selecting the Radio Data System program Use this feature to select one of the 15 Radio Data System program types and search for all the available preset stations of the selected program type. 9 0 3 Press PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control to select the desired program type. The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENT. 10 EFFECT CODE SET TRANSMIT PRESET/CH POWER POWER STANDBY TITLE POWER MENU BAND TV AV ENTER MD CD POP M SET MENU LEVEL SLEEP 3 ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E CD-R RETURN MULTI CH IN CBL DISPLAY ON SCREEN DTV TUNER REC PHONO V-AUX DVR VCR AMP 2 AUDIO DISC SKIP FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START BASIC OPERATION 1 DVD Lights up 4 EON SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME Program type TV 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER 2 Press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK mode. The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in the front panel display. NEWS MODE PTY SEEK START Flashes y To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control again. Descriptions NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Popular music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easylistening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music English 59 RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) 4 Press PTY SEEK START on the remote control to start searching for all the available Radio Data System preset stations. The name of the selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display while this unit is searching for stations. MODE POP M PTY SEEK START Using the Radio Data System station network Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other networks) data service of the Radio Data System station network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all the available preset stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data service of the selected program type for a certain duration of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this unit automatically switches to the local station broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back to the national station once the EON data service ends. PTY HOLD Notes Flashes Lights up y To stop searching for stations, press PTY SEEK START on the remote control again. • You can use this feature only when the EON data service is available. • The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data System station. 9 0 ENT. 10 EFFECT Notes CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER PRESET/CH STANDBY POWER LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND TV • This unit stops searching for stations when a station broadcasting the selected program type is found. • If the station found is not the one you desire, press PTY SEEK START again to resume searching for another station broadcasting the same program type. AV ENTER MD CD SLEEP A/B/C/D/E CD-R RETURN MULTI CH IN CBL DISPLAY ON SCREEN 1 DVD DTV TUNER REC AUDIO PHONO V-AUX DVR VCR TV VOL TV CH VOLUME DISC SKIP AMP FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START EON 3 SOURCE TV 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER 2 60 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel display, select another Radio Data System program so that the EON indicator lights up. RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) 3 Press EON on the remote control repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or SPORT). The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. NEWS Displaying the Radio Data System information Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes EON Lights up y To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display. 9 0 BASIC OPERATION • You can select one of the Radio Data System modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • You can select only the available Radio Data System modes being offered by the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. ENT. 10 EFFECT CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER PRESET/CH STANDBY POWER LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND TV AV ENTER MD CD SLEEP A/B/C/D/E CD-R RETURN MULTI CH IN CBL DISPLAY ON SCREEN 1 DVD DTV TUNER REC AUDIO PHONO V-AUX DVR VCR TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP 2 DISC SKIP FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START EON SOURCE TV 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER English 61 RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (U.K. AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) 2 Press FREQ/TEXT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. FREQ/TEXT PS PTY RT CT Frequency display • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “CT” to display the current time. 62 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. Selecting sound field programs • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 44). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. ■ Front panel operations SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Notes ■ Remote control operations AMP AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE NEXT LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 Sound field program selector buttons OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH PROGRAM selector Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. 63 English Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program descriptions This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” (see page 41) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. ■ For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. y Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 63). Remote control button Features 1 STEREO 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 2 MUSIC Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. Creates an enthusiastic atmosphere where you can feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces the sound environment of a large concert hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT Mono Movie CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces monaural video sources (such as old movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT Game CINEMA DSP processing. Adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 3 64 Sound field program Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button Sound field program Features MOVIE THEATER Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions. MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER General CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 4 Sources MULTI 2-CH 5 ■ For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. y Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 63). Sound field program Features STEREO 2ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources. STEREO 7ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 7.1 channels, providing a larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. The program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated. MUSIC The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A.The listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and energetic sound. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 2-CH 1 2 3 Sources SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button MULTI 2-CH 5 English 65 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Changing sound field parameter settings 2 Turn on the video monitor and then press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display is shown in the OSD. You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. DISPLAY ON SCREEN Notes • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 88). • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 88). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. Sound field program category P02 Cursor MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Sound field parameters Sound field parameter values y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 67. • Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field program parameter settings. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. CODE SET POWER TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 TV AV CD-R STANDBY POWER STANDARD MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR 1 SELECT 6 7 8 ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT ENT. EFFECT LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU BAND AMP ENTER SOURCE TV CH 3 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 5 SPEAKERS PRESET/CH PHONO A/B/C/D/E VOLUME RETURN TV DISPLAY ON SCREEN REC 4 2 AUDIO 1 Press one of the sound field program selector buttons repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. TRANSMIT POWER CD TV VOL 3 Set the component selector switch to AMP. 4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field parameter and then j / i to change the selected sound field parameter value. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE TV ENTER A/B/C/D/E 66 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. y To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 66 for details. Sound field parameter DSP LEVEL Features DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms English 67 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 68 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Reverberation Reverberation Source sound Early reflections 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source 60 dB REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control range: 0 to 250 ms SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Level REV.DELAY 60 dB Source sound REV. LEVEL Time English 69 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.LEVEL Features Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Level Control range: 0 to 100% Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY DIALG.LIFT REV.TIME Dialog lift. Adjust the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2ch Stereo DIRECT 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 39). • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 81). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 79) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 81). 7ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL 70 7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 y SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR. STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 49). English 71 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program speaker layouts Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program. Note Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc. y Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speakers (see page 48). The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows: L Front left speaker SL Surround left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker C Center speaker SR Surround right speaker PL Presence left speaker R Front right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker PR Presence right speaker Speaker from which sound is being output Speaker from which no sound is being output When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are turned off in the front panel display When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and “PRIORITY” is set to “PRch” (see page 81) *3 When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and “PRIORITY” is set to “SBch” (see page 81) *1 *2 Sound field program STEREO 2ch Stereo 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL STEREO 7ch Stereo SL 72 SBL SBR PL L MUSIC Hall in Vienna The Bttm Line The Roxy Thtr ENTERTAINMENT Disco PR C SBL SBR PL L SL L SR SL SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PL R PR C 2-channel audio (stereo) SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PL R PR C 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *1 SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PL R PR C 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *2 SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PL R PR C 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *3 L SR SL SR PR C SBL SBR PL R R R SR PR C SBL SBR R SR SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program MUSIC Pop/Rock ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports Mono Movie Game MOVIE THEATER Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure General 2-channel audio (monaural) PL PR C L SL PL SBL SBR PL SL SBL SBR PR SR SL PL L SR SL SBL SBR SR SL L SL SBL SBR PL L SL SBL SBR L L SR SL SL PR C SBL SBR PL R SR SBL SBR SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C PL R L SR SL SR PR C SBL SBR PL R R R SR PR C SBL SBR R SR SR SL C SBL SBR R SR Pro Logic II PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR Pro Logic IIx PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR Cinema/Music PR C SBL SBR R English SL SL L PR L Cinema PL SR PL R PR C L PL R 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *3 Pro Logic Music SUR. STANDARD Neo:6 Cinema Neo:6 Music SBL SBR SBL SBR PL R PR C L PR C SL PL R Movie/Game PL SR PR C 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *2 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SL SBL SBR PL L PR C L PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *1 R PL R Pro Logic SUR. STANDARD PLII Movie PLII Music PLII Game PLIIx Movie PLIIx Music PLIIx Game C L PR C L PL R PR C L SL SUR. STANDARD DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DTS SBL SBR 2-channel audio (stereo) SR Music 73 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program SUR. ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DTS 2-channel audio (monaural) PL PR C L SL SBL SBR 2-channel audio (stereo) PL R L SR SL Pro Logic SUR. ENHANCED PLII Movie PLIIx Movie PL L SL SBL SBR SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR Pro Logic PR C PR C 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *1 PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR When “PRIORITY” is set to “PRch” PL L SL PR C SBL SBR R SR When “PRIORITY” is set to “SBch” SUR. ENHANCED Neo:6 Cinema PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR When “PRIORITY” is set to “PRch” PL L SL PR C SBL SBR R SR When “PRIORITY” is set to “SBch” STRAIGHT PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Monaural playback 74 PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program 2-channel audio (monaural) 2-channel audio (stereo) 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *1 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *2 5.1/6.1/7.1channel audio *3 Pure Direct PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR Monaural playback SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS English 75 SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 32). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency. 79 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 82 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 82 D)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 83 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 84 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 84 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 84 Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 85 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 86 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 86 D)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 87 76 SET MENU Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 87 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 88 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 88 D)MULTI ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals or selects how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. 89 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 46). ADVANCED OPERATION English 77 SET MENU Using SET MENU 2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. TV AV CD CD-R STEREO MD SLEEP DTV 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TUNER VCR DVR 4 5 PHONO V-AUX MOVIE 3 ENTER EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 10 A/B/C/D/E [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p DVD ENTERTAIN 2 SELECT SET MENU ;AUTOSETUP .;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p MULTI CH IN CBL MUSIC 1 STANDARD PRESET/CH ENT. EFFECT 1 AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU BAND TV ENTER A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN RETURN 1,7 2-6 DISPLAY 3 ON SCREEN REC MOVIE Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. y ;MANUAL SETUP PRESET/CH ENTER You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night listening mode (see page 40). []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. PRESET/CH 1 p A/B/C/D/E 4 Note .1SOUNDMENU 2INPUTMENU 3OPTIONMENU p • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled. • Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each parameter setting. • Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU TV 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 p 78 p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p SET MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)EQUALIZER []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter SET MENU 5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected. PRESET/CH 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 PRESET/CH ENTER 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 p .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p A/B/C/D/E p p ENTER A/B/C/D/E .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)EQUALIZER []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE 6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter and then j / i to change the parameter settings. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH SMALL>LARGE PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU • Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81). • Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the front left and right channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. MENU Note Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. ADVANCED OPERATION 7 FRONT SP If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 81), the LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. English 79 SET MENU Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG Surround back speakers SUR. B L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 SUR. B L/R SP CENTER SP SMLx1 >SMLx2 NONE>SMLLRG • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center speaker. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/ BASS OUT”, and the rest of the center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/ BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the center channel signals are directed to the center speaker. Surround left/right speakers Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. L/R SP SUR. L/R SP NONE>SMLLRG • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 50) and “SUR. B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. 80 • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “SMLx1” (small x 1) if you have a small surround back speaker that does not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” and the rest of the signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “SMLx2” (small x 2) if you have two small surround back speakers that do not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRGx1” (large x 1) if you have a large surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back left and right channel signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “LRGx2” (large x 2) if you have two large surround back speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back left and right channel signals are directed to the surround back left and right speakers. Presence speakers PRESENCE SP Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers connected to this unit. Choices: NONE, YES PRESENCE SP >NONEYES • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect presence speakers. • Select “YES” (yes) if you connected presence speakers and want to use them. SET MENU Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH LFE/BASS OUT SWFRFRNT>BOTH • Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are directed to the subwoofer. • Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 79). • Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 79). 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE >NORMALREVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Presence/Surround back channel priority PRIORITY Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the surround back speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRch, SBch PRIORITY PRch >SBch • Select “PRch” to use the presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from the surround speakers. • Select “SBch” to use the surround back speakers when a surround back channel signals is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals are output from the front speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION Crossover CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 79 and 80). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 79 and 80). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE CROSS OVER FREQ;;;80Hz English 81 SET MENU ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 79). Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. B)SPEAKER LEVEL -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; C)SP DISTANCE • Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left speaker. • Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right speaker. • Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left speaker. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right speaker. • Select “SBL” to adjust the balance of the surround back left speaker. • Select “SBR” to adjust the balance of the surround back right speaker. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer. • Select “PL” to adjust the balance of the presence left speaker. • Select “PR” to adjust the balance of the presence right speaker. Notes • “C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SBL”, “SBR”, “SWFR”, “PL” and “PR” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 80), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 80), “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 80), “LFE/ BASS OUT” (see page 81) and “PRESENCE SP” (see page 80) are set to “NONE” respectively. • Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 80). 82 p p . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;3.00m FRONTR;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;3.00m []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SB L” to adjust the distance of the surround back left speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • Select “SB R” to adjust the distance of the surround back right speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “PRNS L” to adjust the distance of the presence left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “PRNS R” to adjust the distance of the presence right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) SET MENU Notes • “CENTER”, “SUR. L”, “SUR. R”, “SB L”, “SB R”, “SWFR”, “PRNS L” and “PRNS R” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 80), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 80), “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 80), “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81) and “PRESENCE SP” (see page 80) are set to “NONE” respectively. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR. B” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 80). ■ Center graphic equalizer D)EQUALIZER Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the graphic equalizer. Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ When you select “CENTER GEQ” in “EQ TYPE SELECT”, use this feature to adjust the built-in 5frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front left and right speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB D)EQUALIZER Equalizer select EQ TYPE SELECT Use this feature to select the type of equalizer. Choices: AUTO PEQ, CENTER GEQ, EQ OFF D)EQUALIZER EQ TYPE SELECT . CENTER GEQ p p / : CT GEQ [<]/[>]:Select • Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32). • Select “CENTER GEQ” to adjust the built-in 5frequency band graphic equalizer for the center speaker so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front left and right speakers. • Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature. Notes 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p p .TEST>OFFON -______+ 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust y Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the selected frequency band. Test tone TEST Use this feature to make adjustments of “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. • “AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected when you run “AUTO SETUP” (see page 32). • If you press u / d while “CENTER GEQ” is selected, the OSD changes to the following screen. ADVANCED OPERATION English 83 SET MENU ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. G)AUDIO SET .MUTING TYPE;FULL AUDIO DELAY;;0ms TONE BYPASS;AUTO p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB E)LFE LEVEL .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 81), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. F)DYNAMIC RANGE .SP:MINSTD>MAX HP:MINSTD>MAX p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. 84 Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 40). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 39). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone control circuitry. SET MENU 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. 2 INPUTMENU p p .A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)VOLUME TRIM []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 OPTICAL IN (2) OPTICAL IN (3) OPTICAL IN (4) Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVR (3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVR (4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVR OPTICALIN ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V INPUT [A] CMPNT-V INPUT [B] CMPNT-V INPUT [C] Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR [C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR .(2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R) (3);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 COAXIAL IN (5) COAXIAL IN (6) Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR (6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR COAXIALIN .(5);;;;; ( (6);;;;; ( CD CD DVD DVD ) ) CMPNT-VINPUT For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1) Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. ADVANCED OPERATION .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL) [C];;;;; DVR ( DVR ) OPTICALOUT .(1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) English 85 SET MENU ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 41) regardless of the previous setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS” or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST 2 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press j / i on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE B)INPUTMODE ENTER TV A/B/C/D/E >AUTOLAST [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return 3 • Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 41) regardless of the previous setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS” or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. Press u / d to select the character you want to use and then press j / i to move to the next space. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Notes Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) C)INPUTRENAME DVD-> DVD ________ 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press SET MENU on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. 1 p p [<]/[>]:Position []/[]:Chara. Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO 86 SET MENU MENU SET MENU ■ Volume Trim D)VOLUME TRIM Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. 3 OPTIONMENU .A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)MULTI ZONESET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p D)VOLUME TRIM DVD->0.0dB 3 OPTION MENU p Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET [<]/[>]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit A)DISPLAYSET p p .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEOCONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;AUTO []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press j to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press i to make the front panel display brighter. Notes • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. ADVANCED OPERATION Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video signals to component video signals. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. English 87 SET MENU OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press j to raise the position of the OSD. • Press i to lower the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. • Select “OFF” not to display any background in the OSD. ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD C)PARAM.INI Notes • Depending on the video signals being input or the system setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to “OFF”. • Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON B)MEMORYGUARD >OFFON [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – DSP program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. 88 STEREO *MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER *STANDARD Press DSP key Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 88). SET MENU ■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET Use this feature to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit. Speaker B setting SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B D)MULTI ZONESET .SPB;;;;;;;FRONT ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the SPEAKERS B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 50). Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP Use this feature to select either the external or the internal amplifier to amplify the Zone 2 speakers. Choices: INT, EXT ADVANCED OPERATION D)MULTI ZONESET SPB;;;;;;;FRONT . ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “INT” (internal amplifier) to use the internal amplifier of this unit if you connected your Zone 2 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker terminals of this unit. • Select “EXT” (external amplifier) if you do not use the Zone 2 speakers or if you connected your Zone 2 speakers to the external amplifier in Zone 2 connected to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks of this unit. English 89 ADVANCED SETUP ADVANCED SETUP This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 31). • Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. 3 VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT ON A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 91 for a complete list of available parameters. PROGRAM 1-2,5 1 2,4 3 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Currently selected parameter Currently selected parameter setting MASTER SP IMP.-8 MIN ON 2 OFF Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. STRAIGHT While holding down STRAIGHT EFFECT MASTER 5 EFFECT ON OFF Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. MASTER ON OFF y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 90 ADVANCED SETUP ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* 8ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. ■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 95). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00002”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library code for the remote control (see page 95). ■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 95). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81916”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81917”. Surround back Note If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 6ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library code for the remote control (see page 95). ■ Tuner frequency step TU (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. Surround back The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”. ADVANCED OPERATION * ■ Factory presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 103). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. English 91 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 94). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. Set the component selector switch to TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 94). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV/CBL. CODE SET TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO CODE SET AMP *1 POWER TV TV CH STANDBY MD VOLUME SLEEP CD-R CD TV MULTI CH IN CBL TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 POWER AV SOURCE TV VOL TRANSMIT POWER *1 DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR TV VOL TV CH VOLUME PHONO AMP SPEAKERS ENHANCER 9 0 NIGHT SOURCE STRAIGHT TV ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU *2 BAND TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT DISPLAY ON SCREEN REC ENT. 10 AUDIO EFFECT PRESET/CH DISC SKIP FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START EON LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU *2 BAND ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP FREQ/TEXT MODE PTY SEEK START EON Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the component selector switch position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component selector switch is set to AMP. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the component selector switch position. Remote control *2 92 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the component selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/ Cable TV” column on page 93. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling other components U Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 94). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. 1 CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO AMP SOURCE TV CH ENTERTAIN MOVIE 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENT. 10 VOLUME EFFECT 3 4 5 TV 6 TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND 7 8 ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY ON SCREEN 9 REC Remote control DVD player/ recorder VCR Digital TV/ LD player Cable TV CD player MD/CD recorder 1 2 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 3 4 TITLE Title AUDIO DISC SKIP MODE PTY SEEK START Tuner EON iPod® Preset stations (1-8) Band PRESET/CH Up u VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) Up PRESET/CH Down d VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) Down A/B/C/D/E j Left Left Preset down (A-E) A/B/C/D/E i Right Right Preset up (A-E) ENTER Enter Enter RETURN Return Return REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec *3 Rec (recorder) *3 Rec *2*3 p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play w Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward *4 f Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2 Sound e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop ENT. Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Subsequent menu Disc skip Pause Rec *3 Pause Menu Search forward *4 Pause Skip backward ADVANCED OPERATION 7 8 9 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT SPEAKERS FREQ/TEXT 5 6 U MUSIC 1 MULTI CH IN CBL DVD TV VOL 2 SLEEP U STEREO Previous menu Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 94). *3 When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction. *4 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *2 English 93 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the remote control code 1 You can control your TV and other components by setting the appropriate remote control code for each input source. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. Press one of the input selector buttons to select the component you want to set up. MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO The following table shows the default component in the “Library (component category)” column and the remote control code for each input source. 2 Remote Control Code Default Settings Input source Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code CD CD YAMAHA 61907 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 70888 DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539 DTV/CBL – – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916 V-AUX – – – DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544 VCR – – – PHONO – – – Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes 3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter the five-digit remote control code for the component to be used. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the remote control code for the selected component is set. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT TRANSMIT Blank button TAPE YAMAHA 70524 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes. y The blank button is the one on the right of MD/CD-R. EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 10 Flashes ENT. EFFECT y Refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. • If you enter the code number “9980”, the remote control code previously set for the selected component is cleared. 94 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library codes Setting library codes You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to select and operate the desired component with the supplied remote control. Select one of the following codes to set the remote control TUNER ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 ■ Setting remote control AMP ID library codes Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. 2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “00001” or “00002”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is changed. 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “81916” or “81917”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is changed. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 9 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 10 ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes 00001 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 00002 *1 *2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ENT. Flashes Remote control AMP ID *2 TUNER ID library code *1 ID1 (initial setting) 81916 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 81917 ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 91) *1 *2 Function To operate this unit using an alternative code. Remote control TUNER ID *2 ID1 (initial setting) ADVANCED OPERATION Function 10 TRANSMIT EFFECT EFFECT AMP ID library code *1 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 91) Notes • You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 91). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. • You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 91). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 95 English Notes REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Resetting all remote control codes Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “9981”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and all the remote control codes previously set are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 10 ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes EFFECT y If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing procedure. 96 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connecting Zone 2 You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown below. REMOTE IN REMOTE IN REMOTE OUT Infrared signal receiver REMOTE OUT This unit REMOTE IN REMOTE OUT YAMAHA component REMOTE IN REMOTE OUT YAMAHA component ADVANCED OPERATION English 97 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ■ Using the external amplifier To use the external amplifiers in Zone 2, select “EXT” in “ZONE2 AMP” (see page 89). Main zone Second zone ZONE 2 OUTPUT SP OUT Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player Remote control AUDIO IN VIDEO IN This unit MAIN ZONE ZONE 2 Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal emitter REMOTE OUT REMOTE IN Notes • When you do not use the main zone, press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to turn off the main zone. Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in the second zone. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. ■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit To use the internal amplifiers of this unit, select “INT” in “ZONE2 AMP” (see page 89). PRESENCE/ZONE 2 This unit Main zone Second zone IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE The PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. 98 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION Controlling Zone 2 You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are listed as follows: • Selecting the input source of Zone 2 • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 52) • Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source (see page 101) • Adjusting the volume level of the Zone 2 speakers connected directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE2 speaker terminals of this unit when “ZONE2 AMP” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “INT” (see page 89) 2 Press ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2. The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. ZONE CONTROL ZONE2 Flashes 3 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. INPUT Note You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection procedure. • Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on page 52. • Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod operations, see “USING iPod®” on page 101. ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel 1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2. y To adjust the volume level of Zone 2, set “ZONE2 AMP” in “OPTION MENU” to “INT” (see page 89) and then rotate VOLUME. ZONE 2 ON/OFF y 4 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. ZONE 2 ON/OFF ADVANCED OPERATION ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when MASTER ON/ OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER or STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone and Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode. English 99 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ■ Setting the remote control to the Zone 2 mode 1 Note The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control the main zone. To control Zone 2 with the remote control, you must first set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. Press and hold POWER or STANDBY and then press PHONO to set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. • Press POWER when the main zone is turned on. • Press STANDBY when the main zone is turned off. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control lights up while the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode. POWER While holding down PHONO TRANSMIT or TRANSMIT CODE SET Lights up STANDBY Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “9992”. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 10 ENT. 2 Press POWER to turn on Zone 2. POWER TRANSMIT Flashes 3 EFFECT Press one of the input selector buttons to select the desired input source of Zone 2. ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote control MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL Notes DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR VCR PHONO • The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control the main zone, and the TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control is turned off when the remote control is set to the main mode. • When the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode, POWER, STANDBY, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, and the input selector buttons are set to control Zone 2. However, the rest of the remote control buttons remain in the main mode. • The remote control automatically exits from the Zone 2 mode in the following cases: – when you do not make any operations within 10 seconds after the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode. – when you press a remote control button other than POWER, STANDBY, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, and the input selector buttons. 100 y To adjust the volume level of Zone 2, set “ZONE2 AMP” in “OPTION MENU” to “INT” (see page 89) and then rotate VOLUME. 4 Press STANDBY to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. STANDBY USING IPOD® USING iPod® Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 24), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 43). Notes • • • • • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. Compatibility with your iPod may vary depending on the software version of your iPod. The controls on your iPod are not operational when you operate your iPod using the OSD of this unit. There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel or in the OSD of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display up to 14 alphanumeric characters. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 93. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 108. Setting the remote control code You need to first assign the remote control code to V-AUX on the remote control to control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. 1 Press V-AUX on the remote control to select “V-AUX” as the input source. Press CODE SET on the remote control using a ball point pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. Flashes 3 ■ Controlling iPod without using the OSD Note Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. y For a complete list of the remote control buttons used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 93. ADVANCED OPERATION TRANSMIT CODE SET Once the remote control code is assigned to V-AUX on the remote control, you can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with or without the aid of the OSD of this unit. Once “V-AUX” is selected as the input source, you can perform the basic operations of your iPod (see page 93) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. V-AUX 2 Controlling iPod Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “81981”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the remote control code for V-AUX is set. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 10 ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes EFFECT English 101 USING iPod® ■ Controlling iPod using the OSD Once “V-AUX” is selected as the input source, you can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. • Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Setup” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. For details, see “Controlling iPod without using the OSD” on page 101. y • Press MENU on the remote control to move back to the previous menu level. • For a complete list of the remote control buttons used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 93. • A character that cannot be recognized by this unit will be replaced with an underscore “_”. 1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod DISPLAY ON SCREEN 2 > > > > > > > Press u / d on the remote control to select the desired menu and then press ENTER to enter the selected menu. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Setup (setup) 102 Playlists > Songs Artists > Albums > Songs Albums > Songs Songs Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs Composers > Albums > Songs Setup > Shuffle, Repeat, Onscreen, FL Scroll Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a random order. Note When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Note Top Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Setup • • • • • • • When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. On-screen display time Onscreen Use this feature to set the amount of time for which the OSD is displayed after you perform a certain operation on your iPod. Choices: Always, 5s, 10s • Select “Always” to display the OSD unceasingly while you are operating your iPod. • Select “5s” to turn off the OSD 5 seconds after you perform a certain operation on your iPod. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation on your iPod. Front panel display scroll FL Scroll Use this feature to set whether to display the iPod operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once. Choices: Cont, Once • Select “Cont” to display the iPod operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “Once” to display the iPod operation status in the front panel display by 14 alphanumeric characters at once. RESETTING THE SYSTEM RESETTING THE SYSTEM Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position. 3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “PRESET”. VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MASTER OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E EDIT ON l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX S VIDEO ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1-2,5 1 2,4 3 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. PRESET-CANCEL 4 MASTER ON 2 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “RESET”. STRAIGHT OFF EFFECT ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. PRESET-RESET While holding down STRAIGHT y MASTER Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. EFFECT ON OFF 5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit. MASTER ON OFF English 103 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound No picture 104 Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 30 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 13 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 19-27 “INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote control. 38 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 40 “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in DTS. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 41 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. 87 41 38, 44 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Cause The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy See page Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 30, 91 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 40 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13 Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER LEVEL”. Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings. 82 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 80 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 63 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 80 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 45 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE” and “SUR. B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 80 “SUR. B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 80 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 81 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 81 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 105 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) Cause Remedy See page The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 41 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level is low while a record is being played. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier. 23 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 20, 23 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 23 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 88 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — 106 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 28 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 53 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 53 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 53 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — 54, 55 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 107 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 94 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 94 The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. 91, 95 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 24). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 24 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Unknown type The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 24 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — 108 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ AUTO SETUP Before AUTO SETUP Error message Connect MIC! Unplug HP! Cause Optimizer microphone is not connected. Headphones are connected. Remedy See page Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 32 Unplug the headphones. — During AUTO SETUP Error message E-1:NO FRONT SP Cause Remedy See page Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A or B. 38 Check the front L/R speaker connections. 13 E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 13 E-3:NO PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 13 E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. 13 Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-5:NOISY E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. Connect surround speakers when you use surround back speakers. 13 E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 32 The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 32 Check the speaker connections and placement. 13 E-8:NO SIGNAL E-9:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 32 32 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 109 TROUBLESHOOTING After AUTO SETUP Warning message W-1:OUT OF PHASE Cause Remedy Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m. Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — Check the speaker connections. 13 Use speakers of similar quality. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 33 Notes • • • • See page If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again. If warning “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made. If error “E-10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. 110 13 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio information ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround English 111 GLOSSARY ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. 112 Video information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. GLOSSARY Sound field program information ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 113 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 100 W • Video Signal Type ......................................................... PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [Asia, China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 140 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω .......................................................135/170/200/245 W • Maximum Output Power [Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 150 W • IEC Output Power [Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .................................................... 110 W • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................ 120 or more • Frequency Response CD terminal to Front L/R ..................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ...... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................ 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) Phono (5 mV) to REC OUT [Europe, Australia, Asia and Korea models] ......... 81 dB or more [Other models] ...................................................... 86 dB or more CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ............... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R .............................................................. 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shorted) to Front L/R ................. 60 dB/55 dB or more CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ........ 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ............................................... 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ......................................... 3.5 kHz • Phones Output ......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO ................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................ 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT .............................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ....................................................................2 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 4 V/1.7 kΩ ZONE 2 OUTPUT .............................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ 114 • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component ............................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION (except for U.K. model) • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ...... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ........................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ...................................................... 42 dB • Frequency Response ........................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION (except for U.K. model) • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ............... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ........................................................... 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] .............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Europe model] ................................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [General model] ............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ................................. AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 400 W/500 VA [Other models] .................................................................. 440 W • Standby Power Consumption .................................... 0.1 W or less • AC Outlets [Australia model] .............................. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [U.S.A., Canada and China models]... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe, Asia and General models]...... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 171 x 421 mm (17.1 x 6.7 x 16.6 in) • Weight .................................................................. 12.3 kg (27.1 lbs) 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page i Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE LISTE DER FERNBEDIENUNGSCODES LISTA ÖVER FJÄRRSTYRNINGSKODER LIJST MET AFSTANDSBEDIENINGSCODES СПИСОК КОДОВ ДИСТАНЦИОННОГО УПРАВЛЕНИЯ CABLE TV RECEIVER ABC 10003 ADB 11230, 11269 AICHI DENSHI11512 AMSTRAD 11222 AUNA 11230, 11269 AUSTAR 10276 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 10276 BRITISH TELECOM 10003 CABLE & WIRELESS 11068 DX ANTENNA 11500, 11502 FASTWEB 11630 FRANCE TELECOM 10817, 11734 FREEBOX 11482 FUJITSU 11497 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10003, 10276 GOLDEN CHANNEL 11110 HOMECHOICE11590 JERROLD 10003, 10276 MACAB 10817 MADRITEL 11230 MASPRO 11510 MOTOROLA 10276, 11106, 11483 MR ZAP 11112 MR. ZAP 11112 NEC 11496 NOKIA 11569 NOOS 10817, 11624 NTL 10003, 11060, 11068 ONO 11068 OPTUS 10276 PACE 11060, 11068, 11577 PANASONIC 10375, 11488 PHILIPS 10817 PIONEER 11021, 11500 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 10003 SAGEM 10817, 11112, 11624 SAMSUNG 11060, 11666 SATBOX 10375 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 11510 SONY 11460 STARCOM 10003 SUMITOMO 11500, 11503, 11504 SUPERCABLE 10276 TELE DANMARK 11016 TELEWEST 11068 THOMSON 11110, 11734 TORX 10003 TOSHIBA 11509 TRI-VISION 11257 UNITED CABLE 10003 UPC 11582 US ELECTRONICS 10276 CABLE/PVR COMBINATION FRANCE TELECOM11734 FREEBOX 11482 MOTOROLA 11106 NOKIA 11569 NOOS 11624 SUPERCABLE 10276 THOMSON 11734 UPC 11582 DBS/PVR COMBINATION @SAT 11300 ATSAT 11300 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 11175 CANALSATELLITE 11339 COMAG 11412 DIGIFUSION 11645 DIRECTV 10099, 10639 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 11237 ECHOSTAR 10610 FORCE 11194 FOXTEL 11356 GBSAT 11214 HUMAX 11176, 11427, 11670, 11675 KATHREIN 11221, 11561 MAXIMUM 11334 NOKIA 11310, 11311 OPENTEL 11412 PACE 11423, 11623 PANASONIC 11320 PHILIPS 10099 REBOX 11214 SAGEM 11253, 11307, 11692 SHARP 11489 SIEMENS 11657 SKY 11175, 11848, 11850 SKYPLUS 11412 SONY 10639 STRONG 11300 THOMSON 11534, 11900 TOPFIELD 11206, 11545 TPS 11253, 11307 ZEHNDER 11075, 11412 SATELLITE RECEIVER @SAT @SKY ABSAT ADB 11300 11334 10713 10642, 11259, 11367, 11473, 11491 AIWA 11514, 11515 AKAI 10200 ALBA 10713, 11284 ALLSAT 10200, 11017, 11043 ALLSONIC 10369 ALLTECH 10713 ALLVISION 11232, 11334, 11412 AMITRONICA 10713 AMPERE 10132 AMSTRAD 10132, 10713, 10847, 10885, 11113, 11175 ANGLO 10713 ANKARO 10369, 10713, 11279 ANTSAT 11017, 11083 ARCON 11043, 11075, 11279 ARNION 11300 ASAT 10200 ASCI 10114, 11334, 11461 ASLF 10713 ASSCOM 10853 ASTON 11129 ASTRA 10713 ASTRO 10133, 10173, 10369, 10658, 11099, 11100, 11113 ATSAT 11300 ATSKY 11334 AUDIOLINE 11429 AURORA 10879 AUSTAR 10642, 10879, 11259 AXIS 10369, 11111 B@YTRONIC 11412 BENTLEY WALKER 11017 BEST 10369 BIG SAT 11457 BLACK DIAMOND 11284 BLAUPUNKT 10173 BLUE SKY 10713 BOCA 10132, 10713, 11232, 11366, 11474 BOSTON 11251 BRAINWAVE 10658 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 10847, 11175 BROCO 10713 BSKYB BT BUBU SAT BUSH 10847, 11175 11296 10713 11284, 11471, 11672 CANAL DIGITAL 10853, 11622 CANAL+ 10853 CANALSATELLITE 10853, 11339, 11853 CENTREX 11457 CGV 11413 CHESS 10114, 10713, 11334 CITYCOM 10299, 10818, 11075, 11176, 11232 COLOMBIA 10132 COLUMBIA 10132 COMAG 10132, 11232, 11366, 11412, 11413, 11579 CONDOR 10369 CONRAD 10132, 10369 COSHIP 11457 CYRUS 10200 D-BOX 10873 DAEWOO 10713, 11111, 11296, 11743 DELTASAT 11075 DGTEC 11242 DIGENIUS 10299, 11161 DIGIALITY 11685 DIGIFUSION 11645 DIGIQUEST 11457, 11473 DIGISAT 11232 DIGISKY 11457 DIGITALL WORLD 11227 DIJAM 11296 DIRECTV 10099, 10639 DISTRATEL 10885, 11283, 11704 DMT 11075 DNT 10200 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 11237 DUNE 10369 DX ANTENNA 11530 ECHOSTAR 10167, 10610, 10713, 10853, 11200, 11323, 11409, 11467, 11473, 11477 EINHELL 10132, 10713 ELAP 10587, 10713, 11129, 11567 ELSAT 10713 ELTA 10200, 10369 EMME ESSE 10369 EMTECH 11214 ENGEL 10713, 11017, 11251 APPENDIX-i 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page ii Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM EURIEULT EUROLINE EUROPHON EUROSKY 10885 11251 10132, 10299 10114, 10132, 10262, 10299, 10369 EUROSTAR 10818, 10898 EUTELSAT 10713 FENNER 10369, 10713 FERGUSON 10711, 11291 FINLUX 10573 FLAIR MATE 10713 FMD 11457 FORCE 11194 FORTEC STAR 11017, 11083 FOXTEL 10879, 11356 FRACARRO 10125 FTEMAXIMAL10369, 10713, 11556 FUBA 10173, 10262, 10299, 10369, 10573, 11161, 11214 FUGIONKYO 10125 GALAXIS 10369, 10853, 11111, 11557 GARDINER 10818 GARNET 11075 GBSAT 11214 GECCO 11157, 11273, 11412 GENERAL SATELLITE 11176 GF 11043 GF STAR 11043 GLOBO 11251, 11626 GOD DIGITAL 10200 GOLD BOX 10292, 10853 GOLDEN INTERSTAR 11283 GOLDVISION 11017 GOODMANS 11246, 11284 GRUNDIG 10173, 10847, 10853, 10879, 11291 HAENSEL & GRETEL 10132 HANDAN 11622 HANSEATIC 11099, 11100 HAUPPAUGE 11672 HB 11214 HDT 11011 HE@D 11279 HIRSCHMANN10125, 10173, 10299, 10369, 10573, 11111, 11232, 11412 HITACHI 11250, 11284, 11518, 11523, 11525 HUMAX 11176, 11225, 11427, 11648, 11670, 11675, 11743 HUTH 10132, 11017, 11075 HYUNDAI 11011, 11075 ICAN 11367 ID DIGITAL 11176 ILLUSION SAT11557 IMPERIAL 11429 INGELEN 10114 INTERNATIONAL 10132 INTERSTAR 11017, 11214 APPENDIX-ii JAEGER JVC 11334 11507, 11531, 11532 K-SAT 10713 KAMM 10713 KAON 11300 KATELCO 11111 KATHREIN 10114, 10173, 10200, 10249, 10442, 10480, 10504, 10553, 10622, 10658, 10713, 10818, 10898, 11221, 11416, 11561, 11567 KENNEX 10125 KENWOOD 10853 KEY WEST 10132 KITON 10114 KOSCOM 11043 KOSMOS 10442 KREILING 10114, 10249, 10658, 11461 KREISELMEYER 10173 L&S ELECTRONIC 10132, 10369, 11043, 11334 LABGEAR 11296 LASAT 10132, 10173, 10299, 10369 LEMON 11461 LENCO 10369, 10713 LENOXX 11611 LG 11075, 11226 LIFESAT 10132, 10299, 10369, 10713, 11043 LIFETEC 10587 LODOS 11284 LOGIX 11017, 11075 LORENZEN 10132, 10299, 10867, 11161, 11579 LUPUS 10369 LUXOR 10573 LUXORIT 11681 M VISION 11557 MANATA 10132, 10713 MANHATTAN 11017, 11083 MARANTZ 10200 MASPRO 10173, 10713, 11520, 11530 MATSUI 10173, 11284 MAXIMUM 11075, 11334, 11685 MDS 11225 MEDIACOM 11206 MEDIASAT 10292, 10853 MEDION 10132, 10299, 10369, 10713, 11043, 11075, 11232, 11334, 11412, 11626 MEDISON 10713 MEGA 10200 MELECTRONIC 10818 METRONIC 10132, 10713, 10818, 10885, 11279, 11283, 11334, 11691, 11704 METZ 10173 MICRO 10713 MICRO ELEKTRONIC 10713 MICROMAXX 10299, 10369 MICROSTAR 11075 MICROTEC 10713 MORGAN'S 10132, 10200, 10713, 11232, 11412 MULTICHOICE10642, 10879 MYRYAD 10200 MYSAT 10713 NEC 11270, 11519 NEOTION 11334 NETGEM 11322 NETSAT 10099 NEUF TELECOM 11322 NEUF TV 11322 NEUHAUS 10713 NEULING 10132, 11232 NEUSAT 10587, 10713, 11279 NEVELING 11161 NEXTWAVE 11017 NIKKO 10200, 10713 NOKIA 10573, 10751, 10853, 10873, 11023, 11223, 11310, 11311, 11723 NORDMENDE 11611 OKANO 10442 OPENTEL 11232, 11412 OPTEX 10114, 10713, 11043, 11283 OPTUS 10879 ORBIS 11232, 11334, 11412 ORBITECH 10114, 10541, 11099, 11100 P/SAT 11232 PACE 10200, 10329, 10720, 10847, 10853, 10867, 11175, 11323, 11423, 11623, 11850 PACIFIC 11284 PACKARD BELL 11111 PALCOM 10299, 10587, 11161, 11409 PANASAT 10879 PANASONIC 10847, 11104, 11304, 11320, 11404, 11508, 11526, 11527, 11528 PANDA 10173 PANSAT 11011 PATRIOT 10132 PHILIPS 10099, 10133, 10173, 10200, 10292, 10818, 10853, 10898, 11114, 11118, 11672 PHONOTREND11017, 11200 PILOTIME 11339 PINO 11334 PIONEER 10292, 10329, 10352, 10853, 11308 PLASMATIC 10442 PMB PREISNER 10713 10132, 10262, 11113, 11366 PREMIER 10292 PREMIERE 10292, 10873, 11429 PRIMACOM 11111 QUADRAL 10369 QUELLE 10299 RADIOLA 10200 RADIX 11113 RCA 11291 REBOX 11214 RED STAR 10369 REGAL 11251 RFT 10200, 10541 ROADSTAR 10713, 10853 ROVER 10369, 10713 S-ZWO 11207 SAB 11251 SABA 10885 SAGEM 10820, 11114, 11253, 11307, 11690, 11691, 11692, 11694 SAMSUNG 10853, 11017, 11206, 11243, 11293, 11458, 11570 SANYO 11219 SAT CONTROL11300 SAT TEAM 10713 SATEC 10713 SATELCO 10369, 11232 SATPLUS 11100 SATSTATION 11083 SCHAUB LORENZ 11214 SCHNEIDER 11206, 11251 SCHWAIGER 10132, 10504, 10587, 10885, 11075, 11083, 11111, 11334, 11412, 11457, 11474 SCS 10299 SEDEA ELECTRONIQUE 10125, 10132, 11206, 11283 SEG 10114, 10369, 11075, 11251, 11626 SEPTIMO 10885 SERINO 10610 SERVISAT 10713, 11251 SHARP 10541, 11489, 11513, 11517 SIEMENS 10173, 11657 SILVA 10299 SKANTIN 10713 SKARDIN 10587 SKR 10713 SKT 11449 SKY 10099, 10847, 11175, 11848, 11849, 11850 SKY ITALIA 11848, 11849 SKY XL 11251, 11412 SKY+ 11175 SKYMASTER 10587, 10713, 11075, 11200, 11409, 11611 SKYMAX 10200 SKYPLUS 11232, 11334, 11412 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page iii Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM SKYSAT 10114, 10713 SKYVISION 11334 SL 10132, 10299 SM ELECTRONIC 10587, 10713, 11200, 11409 SMART 10132, 10299, 10713, 11113, 11157, 11232, 11273, 11413 SONY 10282, 10292, 10639, 10847, 10853, 11524, 11558 SR 10132 STARLITE 10200 STREAM 11848 STRONG 10125, 10132, 10369, 10713, 10820, 10853, 10879, 11146, 11157, 11258, 11300, 11409, 11430, 11626 SUNNY 11300 SUNNY SOUND 10369 SUNSAT 10713 SUNSTAR 10132, 10369, 10642 SYSTEC 11334 TARBS 11225 TBOSTON 11457 TEAC 11225, 11227, 11251, 11322 TECHNISAT 10114, 10200, 10262, 10541, 11099, 11100, 11322 TECHNOMATE 11283, 11610 TECHNOSONIC 11672 TECHNOTREND 11429 TECHNOWELT10132 TECHSAN 11017 TECHWOOD 10114, 11284 TEKCOMM 11017 TELE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC 11611 TELECIEL 11043 TELEKA 10262 TELESTAR 10114, 11099, 11100, 11251, 11334 TELESYSTEM 11251, 11409 TELETECH 10114 TELEVES 10132, 11214, 11300 TELEWIRE 11232 TEVEBOX 11681 TEVION 10713, 11409, 11622 THOMSON 10292, 10711, 10713, 10820, 10847, 10853, 11046, 11175, 11291, 11498, 11534, 11900 TINY 11672 TIOKO 10132 TOKAI 10200 TONNA 10587, 10713, 11611 TOPFIELD 11206, 11207, 11208, 11545, 11722 TOSHIBA 11501, 11516, 11530 TPS 10820, 11253, 11307 TRIAD 10372 TRIAX 10114, 10132, 10200, 10713, 10853, 11099, 11113, 11157, 11227, 11251, 11291, 11296 TT-MICRO 11429 TURNSAT 10713 TWINNER 10713 UEC 10879 UNIDEN 11521 UNISAT 10132, 10200 UNITED 11251 UNIVERSUM 10114, 10173, 10299, 11099, 11251 VAN HUNEN 11161 VARIOSAT 10173 VEGA 10369 VENTANA 10200 VESTEL 10114, 11251 VISIONIC 10125, 11279, 11283 VISIOSAT 10114, 10713, 11129, 11457 VTECH 10818 WISI 10173, 10299, 10372, 10406, 10638 WISPLUS 11258 WORLDSAT 10114, 11214, 11251, 11323 XRYPTON 10369 XSAT 10713, 10847, 11214, 11323 XTREME 11300 YAKUMO 11413 ZEHNDER 10114, 10369, 10504, 10818, 11075, 11232, 11251, 11334, 11412, 11413 HDTV DECORDER PIONEER SHARP 11010 11010 OTHER VIDEO ACCESSORIES ABS 11272 ALIENWARE 11272 CYBERPOWER11272 GATEWAY 11272 HAUPPAUGE 11408 HEWLETT PACKARD 11272 HOWARD COMPUTERS 11272 HP 11272 HUSH 11272 IBUYPOWER 11272 LINKSYS 11272 MEDIA CENTER PC 11272 MICROSOFT 11272 MIND 11272 NIVEUS MEDIA 11272 NORTHGATE 11272 PACKARD BELL 11272 PINNACLE SYSTEMS 11447 PIONEER 11010 RICAVISION 11272 SHARP 11010 SONY 11272, 11733 STACK 9 11272 SYSTEMAX 11272 TOSHIBA 11272 TOUCH 11272 VIEWSONIC 11272 VOODOO 11272 ZT GROUP 11272 TV A.R. SYSTEMS20374, 20455 ACER 21339 ACURA 20009 ADL 21217 ADMIRAL 20093, 20163, 20264 ADVENT 20817 AGB 20516 AIKO 20009, 20264 AIM 20805 AIWA 21180 AKAI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20163, 20178, 20208, 20218, 20264, 20361, 20371, 20433, 20473, 20480, 20516, 20548, 20556, 20602, 20606, 20631, 20696, 20714, 20715, 20729, 20745, 20753, 21207 AKIBA 20037, 20218, 20455 AKITO 20037 AKURA 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20412, 20668, 20714, 21037, 21982 ALBA 20009, 20037, 20163, 20218, 20355, 20371, 20418, 20443, 20487, 20668, 20714, 21037 ALL-TEL 20865 ALLSTAR 20037 AMPLIVISION 20370 AMSTRAD 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20371, 20412, 20433, 20516, 21037 ANAM 20009, 20250 ANAM NATIONAL2 0250 ANDERSSON 21149, 21163 ANGLO 20009, 20264 ANITECH 20009, 20037 ANSONIC 20009, 20292, 20370, 20668 APEX DIGITAL20890, 21217 ARDEM 20037, 20714 ARISTONA 20037, 20556 ART 21037 ASORA 20009 ASUKA 20218, 20264 AUDIOSONIC 20009, 20037, 20109, 20218, 20264, 20370, 20374, 20486, 20714, 20715 AUDIOTON 20264, 20486 AUDIOWORLD20698 AWA 20009, 20108, 20606 AXXENT 20009 BAIRD 20208 BANG & OLUFSEN 20565 BASIC LINE 20009, 20037, 20218, 20374, 20455, 20556, 20668, 21037, 21163 BAUER 20805 BAUR 20037, 20361, 20512 BEAUMARK 20178 BEKO 20037, 20370, 20418, 20486, 20606, 20714, 20715, 20808, 21037 BELSON 20698 BEON 20037, 20418 BERTHEN 20668 BESTAR 20037, 20370, 20374 BESTAR-DAEWOO 20374 BLACK DIAMOND 20614, 20821, 21037, 21909 BLAUPUNKT 20170, 20195, 20200, 20327, 20455 BLUE SKY 20037, 20218, 20455, 20487, 20556, 20668, 20714, 20715, 20808, 21037, 21191 BLUESKY 21388 BOOTS 20009 BOXLIGHT 20736 BPL 20037, 20896 BRANDT 20109, 20335, 20560, 20625, 20714 BRINKMANN 20037, 20418, 20486, 20668 BTC 20218 BUSH 20009, 20037, 20208, 20218, 20264, 20355, 20361, 20371, 20374, 20487, 20556, 20614, 20617, 20660, 20668, 20698, 20714, 20778, 21037, 21243 BYDESIGN 21309, 21311 APPENDIX-iii 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page iv Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM CANTON CARAD 20218 20610, 20668, 21037 CARENA 20037, 20455 CARVER 20054, 20170 CASCADE 20009, 20037 CASIO 20037 CATHAY 20037 CCE 20037 CELEBRITY 20000 CELESTIAL 20820, 20821 CENTREX 20780 CENTRUM 21037 CENTURION 20037 CGE 20074, 20370, 20418 CHANGHONG 20821 CIMLINE 20009, 20218 CITIZEN 20060 CITY 20009 CLARIVOX 20037 CLATRONIC 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20370, 20371, 20606, 20714 CLAYTON 21037 CONDOR 20009, 20037, 20264, 20370, 20411, 20418 CONIA 20754 CONRAC 20808 CONTEC 20009, 20037 CONTINENTAL EDISON 20109, 20487 COSMEL 20037 CROSLEY 20054, 20074 CROWN 20009, 20037, 20053, 20208, 20370, 20412, 20418, 20486, 20487, 20606, 20712, 20714, 20715, 21037 CS ELECTRONICS 20218 CURTIS MATHES 20054, 20060, 20093, 20145 CYBERTRON 20218 CYTRONIX 21298 D-VISION 20556 DAEWOO 20009, 20037, 20218, 20374, 20556, 20634, 20865, 20880, 21307, 21909 DAINICHI 20218 DANSAI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20208 DANSETTE 20412 DANTAX 20714, 20715 DAVIS 20736 DAYTEK 21207 DAYTON 20009, 21207 DAYTRON 20374 DE GRAAF 20208, 20548 DECCA 20037, 20516 DENKO 20264 DENON 20145, 20511 DENVER 20037, 20587, 21189 DESMET 20009, 20037 DIAMANT 20037 DIAMOND 20825 APPENDIX-iv DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 20698 DIGATRON 20037 DIGILINE 20105, 20668 DIGITAL LIFE 20780, 20872, 20891 DIGITOR 20037, 20698 DIGIX 20880 DIXI 20009, 20037 DL 20891 DMTECH 21338 DOMEOS 20668 DOMLAND 20394 DREAM VISION 21704 DSE 20698 DUAL 20037, 20352, 20394 DVX 20891 DYNATRON 20037 E-ELITE 20218 ECCO 20773 EDISON-MINERVA 20487 EIKI 20735 ELBE 20292, 20411, 20435, 20516, 20610 ELBE-SHARP 20516 ELECTROBAND 20000 ELECTROGRAPH 21755 ELEKTA 20264 ELIN 20009, 20037, 20361, 20548 ELITE 20218 ELTA 20009, 20264 EMERSON 20037, 20178, 20361, 20370, 20371, 20486, 20714, 21909 ENVISION 21365 ERRES 20037 ESC 20037 ETRON 20001, 20009 EUROFEEL 20264 EUROMAN 20037, 20264 EUROPA 20037 EUROPHON 20516 EVOLUTION 21756 EXQUISIT 20037 FENNER 20009, 20374 FERGUSON 20037, 20053, 20109, 20195, 20335, 20443, 20548, 20560, 20625, 21037 FIDELITY 20037, 20163, 20264, 20361, 20371, 20412, 20512 FINLANDIA 20163, 20208, 20346, 20548 FINLUX 20037, 20105, 20346, 20411, 20473, 20480, 20492, 20516, 20631, 20714, 20715, 20808 FIRSTLINE 20009, 20037, 20208, 20361, 20374, 20411, 20556, 20668, 20714, 20808, 21037, 21191, 21307, 21363, 21388 FISHER 20208, 20370, 20555 FLINT 20037, 20218, 20264, 20455, 20610 FORCE 21149 FORMENTI 20037 FORTRESS 20093 FRABA 20037, 20370 FRIAC 20009, 20037, 20370, 20610 FRONTECH 20009, 20163, 20264 FUJIMARO 20865 FUJITSU 20009, 20683, 20853 FUJITSU GENERAL 20009, 20683 FUJITSU SIEMENS 21298 FUNAI 20264, 20668 GALAXI 20037 GALAXIS 20037, 20370 GATEWAY 21755, 21756 GBC 20009, 20218, 20374 GE 20093, 20178, 20560, 20625, 20735 GEC 20037, 20163, 20361, 20516 GELOSO 20009, 20374 GENERAL TECHNIC 20009 GENESIS 20009 GENEXXA 20009, 20163, 20218 GERICOM 20808, 20865, 20880, 21206, 21217, 21298 GOLDFUNK 20668 GOLDSTAR 20001, 20037, 20109, 20163, 20178, 20361, 20377, 20606, 20714, 20715 GOODING 20487 GOODMANS 20009, 20035, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20335, 20360, 20371, 20374, 20480, 20487, 20516, 20556, 20560, 20634, 20668, 20714, 20808, 20880, 21037, 21163, 21909 GORENJE 20370 GPM 20218 GRADIENTE 20053, 20170 GRAETZ 20163, 20361, 20371, 20487, 20714 GRANADA 20037, 20108, 20163, 20208, 20226, 20473, 20516, 20548, 20560 GRANDIN 20009, 20037, 20163, 20374, 20455, 20610, 20668, 20714, 20715, 20865, 20880, 21037, 21191, 21374, 21388 GRUNDIG 20037, 20195, 20443, 20487, 20556, 20587, 20740, 21223 H&B 20808 HAIER 20698, 20891 HALLMARK 20178 HANIMEX 20218 HANSEATIC 20009, 20037, 20361, 20377, 20394, 20556, 20634, 20714, 20808 HANTAREX 20009, 20037, 20516, 20829, 20865, 21338 HANTOR 20037 HARMAN/KARDON 20054 HARSPER 20865 HARWA 20773, 21196, 21269 HARWOOD 20009, 20037, 20412, 20487 HAVERMY 20093 HCM 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20412, 20418 HELIOS 20865 HEMA 20009 HIKONA 20218 HINARI 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20355 HISAWA 20218, 20455, 20610, 20714 HISENSE 20508, 20556, 20780, 21363 HITACHI 20037, 20105, 20108, 20109, 20145, 20163, 20178, 20225, 20473, 20480, 20481, 20492, 20516, 20548, 20578, 20634, 20744, 20797, 21037, 21149, 21194, 21576 HITACHI FUJIAN 20108 HITSU 20009, 20218, 20455, 20610 HOEHER 20714, 20865 HOME ELECTRONICS 20606 HORNYPHON 20037 HUANYU 20374 HUGOSON 20890, 21217 HUMAX 21295 HYPER 20009 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page v Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM HYPSON 20037, 20264, 20455, 20668, 20714, 20715, 21037 HYUNDAI 20860, 20865, 20876, 21152, 21244, 21294 IBERIA 20037 ICE 20218, 20264, 20371 ICES 20218 IIYAMA 20877, 21217 IMPERIAL 20037, 20074, 20370, 20418 INDIANA 20037 INFINITY 20054 INFOCUS 20736, 20752, 21164, 21206 INGELEN 20163, 20487, 20610, 20714 INGERSOLL 20009 INNO HIT 20009, 20516, 21163 INNOWERT 20865, 21298 INTERBUY 20037, 20264 INTERFUNK 20037, 20163, 20200, 20327, 20361, 20512 INTERNAL 20037, 21909 INTERVISION 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20377, 20394, 20455, 20486, 20487 IRRADIO 20218, 20371 ISUKAI 20037, 20218, 20455 ITS 20264, 20371 ITT 20163, 20208, 20346, 20361, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20610 ITT NOKIA 20163, 20208, 20346, 20361, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20606, 20610 ITV 20037, 20264, 20374 IX 20877 JBL 20054 JCB 20000 JDV 21982 JENSEN 20817 JMB 20443, 20556, 20634 JOCEL 20712 JUBILEE 20556 JVC 20053, 20093, 20218, 20371, 20418, 20606, 20650, 20653, 20683, 20731 KAISUI 20009, 20037, 20218, 20455 KAPSCH 20163, 20361 KARCHER 20264, 20606, 20610, 20714, 20778 KATHREIN 20556 KAWA 20371 KB ARISTOCRAT 20163 KENDO 20037, 20411, 20610 KENNEDY KENNEX KIOTA KITON KNEISSEL 20435 21037 20001 20037, 20668 20037, 20292, 20374, 20411, 20435, 20556, 20610 KONKA 20037, 20218, 20371, 20418, 20587, 20641, 20714, 20754 KONTAKT 20487 KORPEL 20037 KOYODA 20009 KREISEN 20876 KYOSHU 20412, 20418 KYOTO 20163 L&S ELECTRONIC 20714, 20808 LASAT 20486 LEADER 20009 LECSON 20037 LEMAIR 20411 LENCO 20037, 20374 LEYCO 20037, 20264 LG 20037, 20178, 20442, 20556, 20698, 20714, 20715, 20829, 21146, 21148, 21191 LIESENK & TTER 20037 LIESENKOTTER 20037, 20327 LIFETEC 20037, 20218, 20374, 20668, 20714, 21037 LOCAL INDIA TV 20264, 20371, 20602 LODOS 21037 LOEWE 20037, 20136, 20292, 20512, 20516, 20633, 20790 LOGIK 20001, 20773, 20880, 21217 LOGIX 20668 LUKER 21982 LUMA 21037 LUX MAY 20009, 20037 LUXOR 20163, 20208, 20361, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20631, 21037, 21163 LXI 20054, 20156, 20178 M ELECTRONIC 20009, 20037, 20105, 20109, 20163, 20346, 20374, 20480 MADISON 20037 MAGNADYNE 20516 MAGNAFON 20516 MAGNAVOX 20054, 20780 MAGNUM 20037, 20714, 20715 MANESTH 20035, 20037, 20264 MANHATTAN 20037, 20668, 20778, 21037 MARANTZ 20037, 20054, 20412, 20556, 20704 MARK 20037, 20714, 20715 MASUDA 20009, 20218 MATSUI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20195, 20208, 20335, 20355, 20371, 20433, 20443, 20455, 20487, 20516, 20556, 20714, 21037 MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650 MAXENT 21755 MEDIATOR 20037 MEDION 20037, 20512, 20556, 20668, 20698, 20714, 20808, 20880, 21037, 21248 MEGAS 20610 MEGATRON 20145, 20178 MEI 21037 MELECTRONIC 20009, 20037, 20105, 20163, 20195, 20346, 20374, 20411, 20480, 20492, 20512, 20634, 20714 MEMOREX 20009, 20060, 20178, 20250, 21037 MERCURY 20009 METRONIC 20625 METZ 20037, 20367, 20388, 20447, 20587, 20668, 20746, 21163 MGA 20178 MICROMAXX 20037, 20668, 20808, 21037 MICROSTAR 20808 MIKOMI 21149 MINATO 20037 MINERVA 20108, 20487, 20516 MINOKA 20412 MITSUBISHI 20037, 20093, 20108, 20178, 20250, 20512, 20556, 21037 MIVAR 20292, 20516, 20609 MONACO 20009 MORGAN'S 20037 MOTOROLA 20093 MTC 20060, 20370, 20512 MTLOGIC 20714 MULTITEC 20037, 20486, 20668, 21037 MULTITECH 20009, 20037, 20264, 20486 MURPHY 20163 MUSIKLAND 20218 MYRYAD 20556 NAD 20156, 20178, 20361 NAIKO 20037, 20606, 21982 NAT 20226 NATIONAL NEC 20226 20009, 20053, 20156, 20170, 20374, 20455, 20587, 20704, 21704 NECKERMANN 20037, 20200, 20327, 20370, 20411, 20418, 20556 NEI 20037, 20371 NEOVIA 20865, 20876, 21206, 21318, 21338, 21371, 21373, 21376, 21390 NETSAT 20037 NETTV 21755 NEUFUNK 20037, 20218, 20556, 20610, 20714 NIKKAI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20218, 20264 NIKKO 20178 NOKIA 20163, 20208, 20346, 20361, 20374, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20606, 20610, 20631 NORCENT 21365 NORDMENDE 20037, 20109, 20195, 20560, 20714 NORMEREL 20037 NOVATRONIC 20037, 20105, 20374 OCEANIC 20163, 20208, 20361, 20473, 20548 OKANO 20009, 20037, 20370 OMEGA 20264 OMNI 20891 ONIMAX 20714 ONWA 20218, 20371, 20433 OPTIMUS 20250, 20650 OPTONICA 20093 ORION 20037, 20355, 20412, 20443, 20516, 20556, 20714, 20880 ORLINE 20037, 20218 ORMOND 20668, 21037 ORSOWE 20516 OSAKI 20037, 20218, 20264, 20355, 20374, 20412, 20556 OSO 20218 OSUME 20037, 20218 OTTO VERSAND 20037, 20093, 20109, 20226, 20361, 20512, 20556 PACIFIC 20443, 20556, 20714, 21037 PALLADIUM 20037, 20370, 20411, 20418, 20714 APPENDIX-v 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page vi Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM PALSONIC 20001, 20037, 20264, 20418, 20698, 20773 PANAMA 20037, 20264 PANASHIBA 20001 PANASONIC 20037, 20163, 20226, 20250, 20361, 20367, 20516, 20548, 20650, 20853, 21210, 21310 PANAVISION 20037, 20411 PATHE CINEMA 20163 PAUSA 20009 PENNEY 20060, 20156, 20178 PERDIO 20037, 20163 PHILCO 20037, 20054, 20074, 20145, 20370, 20418 PHILIPS 20009, 20037, 20054, 20200, 20361, 20374, 20556, 20772, 21756 PHOENIX 20037, 20486 PHONOLA 20037 PIONEER 20037, 20109, 20163, 20361, 20486, 20512, 20679, 20760 PIONIER 20486 PLANTRON 20009 PLAYSONIC 20037, 20714, 20715 POLAROID 20865 PORTLAND 20374 POWERPOINT 20037, 20487, 20698 PRANDONI-PRINCE 20361, 20516 PRIMA 20264, 20412 PRINSTON 21037 PRINZ 20361 PROFEX 20009, 20163, 20361 PROFI 20009 PROFITRONIC 20037 PROLINE 20037, 20411, 20625, 20634, 21037 PROSONIC 20037, 20668, 20714 PROTECH 20009, 20037, 20264, 20418, 20486, 20668, 21037 PROTON 20178 PROVISION 20037, 20556, 20714 PROXIMA 20735 PYE 20037, 20374, 20556 QUADRAL 20218 QUASAR 20009, 20250, 20650, 20865 QUELLE 20037, 20074, 20200, 20327, 20361, 20512, 20668, 21037 R-LINE 20037 RADIALVA 20218 APPENDIX-vi RADIOLA 20037, 20556 RADIOMARELLI 20037, 20516 RADIOSHACK 20037, 20178 RADIOTONE 20009, 20037, 20264, 20412, 20668, 21037 RCA 20093, 20625, 20679 REALISTIC 20178 REDIFFUSION 20346, 20361, 20548 REFLEX 20037, 20668, 21037 RELISYS 20865, 20876, 20877, 20878, 21206, 21207, 21268, 21298 REOC 20714 REVOX 20037 REX 20163, 20264, 20411 RFT 20037, 20264 RINEX 20773 ROADSTAR 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20418, 20668, 20714, 21037, 21189 ROVER 20877 ROWA 20698, 20712 ROYAL LUX 20335, 20412 SABA 20109, 20163, 20250, 20335, 20361, 20498, 20516, 20548, 20560, 20625, 20714 SAGEM 20455, 20610, 20830, 21313 SAISHO 20009, 20264, 20516 SAIVOD 20037, 20668, 20712, 21037, 21163, 21982 SAKAI 20163 SALORA 20163, 20208, 20361, 20480, 20516, 20548, 20631 SALSA 20335 SAMBERS 20516 SAMPO 21755 SAMSUNG 20009, 20037, 20060, 20163, 20178, 20208, 20264, 20370, 20482, 20556, 20587, 20618, 20644 SANSUI 20037, 20727, 20729, 20861 SANTON 20009 SANYO 20088, 20108, 20170, 20208, 20370, 20555, 20704, 20735 SBR 20037, 20556 SCEPTRE 21217 SCHAUB LORENZ 20361, 20374, 20486, 20548, 20606, 20714, 21191 SCHNEIDER 20037, 20163, 20218, 20352, 20361, 20371, 20394, 20556, 20668, 20714, 21037 SCOTCH 20178 SCOTLAND 20163 SCOTT 20178 SEARS 20054, 20156, 20178 SEAWAY 20634 SEELVER 21037 SEG 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20487, 20634, 20668, 21037, 21163 SEI 20516 SEI-SINUDYNE 20037, 20516 SELECO 20163, 20264, 20346, 20371, 20411, 20435 SEMP 20156 SENCORA 20009 SENTRA 20035 SERINO 20093, 20455, 20610 SHARP 20053, 20093, 20200, 20491, 20516, 21163, 21193 SHENG CHIA 20093 SHINTOSHI 20037 SHIVAKI 20037, 20443 SIAREM 20516 SIEMENS 20037, 20195, 20200, 20327 SIERA 20556 SIESTA 20370 SILVA 20037, 20361 SILVA SCHNEIDER 20037 SILVER 20361, 20715 SILVERCREST 21037 SINGER 20009, 20335, 20433, 20435 SINOTEC 20773 SINUDYNE 20516 SKY 20037, 20880 SKYSONIC 20696 SLIDING 20865, 20880, 21318, 21374, 21388 SLX 20668 SMARAGD 20487 SOEMTRON 20865, 21298 SOLAVOX 20037, 20163, 20361, 20548 SONAWA 20218 SONIKO 20037 SONITRON 20208, 20370 SONOKO 20009, 20037 SONOLOR 20163, 20208, 20361, 20548 SONTEC 20009, 20037, 20370 SONY 20000, 20037, 20053, 20093, 20145, 20156, 20170, 20250, 20353, 21100, 21505, 21751 SOUND & VISION 20374 SOUNDESIGN 20178 SOUNDWAVE 20037, 20418, 20715 SPECTRA 20009 SSANGYONG 20009 STANDARD 20009, 20037, 20218, 20374, 21037 STARLITE 20009, 20037, 20264 STENWAY 20218 STERN 20163, 20411 STEVISON 21982 STRATO 20009, 20037, 20264 STRONG 21149, 21163 SUNKAI 20355, 20455, 20487, 20610, 20865 SUNSTAR 20009, 20037, 20264, 20371 SUNWOOD 20037 SUPERLA 20516 SUPERSCAN 20093 SUPERSONIC 21189 SUPERTECH 20009, 20037, 20218 SUPRA 20009 SUPREME 20000 SUSUMU 20218, 20335 SVA 20587, 20865, 20872 SYLVANIA 20054 SYSLINE 20037 T+A 20447 TANDBERG 20367 TANDY 20093, 20163, 20218 TARGA 21307 TASHIKO 20163 TATUNG 20037, 20516, 21756 TCM 20714, 20808 TEAC 20009, 20037, 20170, 20178, 20264, 20412, 20418, 20455, 20512, 20668, 20698, 20712, 21037, 21149, 21755, 21909 TEC 20009, 20037 TECH LINE 20037, 20668 TECHNICS 20250, 20556, 20650 TECHNISAT 20556 TECHNISSON 20714 TECHNOSONIC 20556 TECHWOOD 21163 TECNIMAGEN 20556 TEDELEX 20009, 20891 TEKNIKA 20054, 20060 TELECOR 20394 TELEFUNKEN 20037, 20074, 20109, 20335, 20346, 20486, 20498, 20560, 20625, 20714, 20896 TELEFUSION 20037 TELEGAZI 20037 TELEMAGIC 20735 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page vii Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM TELESONIC TELESTAR TELESYSTEM TELETECH 20037 20037, 20556 20876 20009, 20037, 20668, 21037 TELEVIEW 20037 TEMPEST 20009 TENNESSEE 20037 TENSAI 20009, 20037, 20105, 20218, 20371, 20374, 20377, 20715, 21037 TENSON 20009 TEVION 20556, 20668, 20714, 20808, 21037, 21248, 21298 TEXET 20009, 20218, 20374 THOMSON 20037, 20109, 20335, 20560, 20625 THORN 20035, 20037, 20074, 20109, 20335, 20361, 20512 TINY 21269 TINY DIGITAL 20660 TMK 20178 TOKAI 20009, 20037, 20163, 20374, 20668, 21037 TOKAIDO 21037 TOKYO 20035 TOMASHI 20218 TONGTEL 20780 TOSHIBA 20035, 20060, 20109, 20156, 20195, 20241, 20508, 20618, 20650, 20714, 20736, 21163, 21164, 21704 TRANS CONTINENS 20037, 20668, 21037 TRANS-CONTINENTS 20865, 21374 TRANSONIC 20009, 20037, 20587, 20698, 20712 TRIDENT 20516 TRISTAR 20218 TRIUMPH 20346, 20516, 20556 TVTEXT 95 20556 UHER 20037, 20374, 20418, 20480, 20486 ULTRAVOX 20037 UNIC LINE 20037, 20455 UNITED 20037, 20714, 20715, 21037 UNIVERSAL 20037 UNIVERSUM 20009, 20037, 20074, 20105, 20170, 20200, 20264, 20327, 20346, 20361, 20370, 20411, 20418, 20473, 20480, 20492, 20512, 20618, 20631, 20668, 21037, 21163 UNIVOX 20037, 20163 V2MAX 20865 V7 VIDEOSEVEN 21376, 21755 V7VIDEOSEVEN 20880 VESTEL 20037, 20556, 20668, 21037, 21163 VICTOR 20053, 20653 VIDEOCON 20508 VIDEOLOGIC 20218 VIDEOLOGIQUE 20218 VIDIKRON 20054, 20735 VIDTECH 20178 VIEWPIA 20876 VIEWSONIC 20797, 21755 VIORE 21207 VISION 20037 VIZIO 21756 VOXSON 20163, 20178, 20418 WALTHAM 20037, 20109, 20163, 20418, 20443, 20668, 21037 WARDS 20000, 20054, 20060, 20156, 20178 WATSON 20009, 20037, 20218, 20394, 20668, 21037 WAYCON 20156 WEGA 20037 WELLTECH 20714 WESTINGHOUSE 20890 WHARFEDALE 20037, 20556 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 20037, 21909 WINDSOR 21037 WINDY SAM 20556 WORLD-OF-VISION 20865, 20877, 20880, 20890, 21298 X-VIEW 21191 XENIUS 20634 XLOGIC 20860 XORO 21196, 21217, 21243 XRYPTON 20037 YAMADA 21340 YAMAHA 20650, 20769, 20797, 21405, 21406, 21407, 21576 YAMISHI 20455 YAPSHE 20250 YOKAN 20037 YOKO 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264 ZANUSSI ZENITH 20264 20178, 21909 PVR ABS 31972 ALIENWARE 31972 CYBERPOWER 31972 DELL 31972 GATEWAY 31972 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUSH 31972 IBUYPOWER 31972 JVC 31279 LINKSYS 31972 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 NIVEUS MEDIA31972 NORTHGATE 31972 PANASONIC 31244, 31807, 31808, 31809 PHILIPS 31340 SONY 31636, 31972 STACK 9 31972 SYSTEMAX 31972 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TOSHIBA 30828, 31008, 31972 TOUCH 31972 VIEWSONIC 31972 VOODOO 31972 ZT GROUP 31972 VCR ABS ACCENT ADMIRAL ADVENTURA ADYSON AIKO AIWA 31972 30072 30048 30000 30072 30278 30000, 30032, 30037, 30307, 30348, 30352 AKAI 30041, 30106, 30240, 30315, 30348, 30352, 30642 AKIBA 30072 AKURA 30072 ALBA 30000, 30072, 30081, 30278, 30315, 30348, 30352 ALIENWARE 31972 ALLSTAR 30081 AMERICA ACTION 30278 AMSTRAD 30000, 30072, 30278 ANAM 30037, 30162, 30226, 30240 ANAM NATIONAL 30162, 30226 ANITECH 30072 ANSONIC 30000 ARISTONA 30081 ASA ASHA ASUKA AUDIOSONIC AUDIOVOX AVP AWA BAIRD 30037, 30081 30240 30037, 30038 30278 30037, 30278 30000, 30352 30043 30000, 30041, 30104, 30106 BASIC LINE 30072, 30104, 30278 BEAUMARK 30240 BEKO 30104 BELL & HOWELL 30104 BESTAR 30278 BLACK DIAMOND 30642 BLACK PANTHER 30278 BLAUPUNKT 30034, 30081, 30162, 30226 BLUE SKY 30037, 30072, 30278, 30348, 30352, 30480, 30642 BONDSTEC 30072 BRANDT 30041, 30206, 30320, 30321 BRANDT ELECTRONIQUE 30041 BRINKMANN 30348 BROKSONIC 30348 BUSH 30000, 30072, 30081, 30278, 30315, 30348, 30352, 30642 CALIX 30037 CARREFOUR 30045 CARVER 30081 CASIO 30000 CATHAY 30278 CCE 30072, 30278 CGE 30000 CIMLINE 30072 CITIZEN 30037, 30278 CLATRONIC 30000, 30072 COLT 30072 COMBITECH 30352 CONDOR 30278 CRAIG 30037, 30072, 30240 CROWN 30037, 30072, 30278, 30480 CURTIS MATHES 30041, 30162 CYBERNEX 30240 CYBERPOWER31972 CYRUS 30081 DAEWOO 30045, 30278, 30352, 30637, 30642 DANSAI 30072, 30278 DANTAX 30352 DE GRAAF 30042, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30166 DECCA 30000, 30067, 30081, 30352 DEITRON 30278 DELL 31972 DENKO 30072 DENON 30042 DIAMANT 30037 APPENDIX-vii 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page viii Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 30642 DIGITOR 30642 DSE 30642 DUAL 30000, 30041, 30081, 30278, 30348 DUMONT 30000, 30081, 30104 DYNATECH 30000 ELBE 30038, 30278 ELCATECH 30072 ELECTROHOME 30037 ELECTROPHONIC 30037 ELIN 30240 ELSAY 30072 ELTA 30072, 30278 EMEREX 30032 EMERSON 30000, 30037, 30043, 30045, 30072, 30278, 30637 ESC 30240, 30278 FERGUSON 30000, 30041, 30278, 30320, 30321 FIDELITY 30000, 30072, 30240, 30352 FINLANDIA 30000, 30037, 30042, 30043, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30106, 30166, 30226 FINLUX 30000, 30042, 30081, 30104 FIRSTLINE 30037, 30043, 30045, 30072, 30278, 30348, 30480 FISHER 30104 FLINT 30348 FRONTECH 30072 FUJI 30033 FUJITSU 30000, 30045 FUNAI 30000 GALAXIS 30278 GARRARD 30000 GATEWAY 31972 GE 30048, 30240, 30320 GEC 30081 GENERAL 30045 GENERAL TECHNIC 30348 GENEXXA 30104 GOLDHAND 30072 GOLDSTAR 30037, 30038, 30480 GOODMANS 30000, 30037, 30072, 30081, 30278, 30348, 30352, 30637, 30642 GPX 30037 GRADIENTE 30000 GRAETZ 30041, 30104, 30240 GRANADA 30000, 30037, 30042, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30226, 30240 GRANDIN 30000, 30037, 30072, 30278 APPENDIX-viii GRUNDIG 30034, 30072, 30081, 30226, 30320, 30347, 30348, 30352 HANIMEX 30352 HANSEATIC 30037, 30038, 30081 HARLEY DAVIDSON 30000 HARMAN/KARDON 30038, 30081 HARWOOD 30072 HCM 30072 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HINARI 30041, 30072, 30240, 30278, 30352 HISAWA 30352 HISCHITO 30045 HITACHI 30000, 30037, 30041, 30042, 30081, 30166, 30240 HOEHER 30278, 30642 HORNYPHON 30081 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 30042 HUSH 31972 HYPSON 30000, 30037, 30072, 30278, 30480 IBUYPOWER 31972 IMPERIAL 30000 INGERSOLL 30240 INNO HIT 30072 INTERBUY 30072 INTERFUNK 30081, 30104 INTERNAL 30278, 30637 INTERNATIONAL 30037, 30278, 30642 INTERVISION 30000, 30278 IRRADIO 30072, 30081 ITT 30041, 30104, 30106, 30240 ITV 30037, 30278 JBL 30278 JENSEN 30041 JMB 30348, 30352 JOYCE 30000 JVC 30041, 30067, 30206, 31008, 31279 KAISUI 30072 KAMBROOK 30037 KARCHER 30081, 30278, 30642 KEC 30037, 30278 KENDO 30072, 30106, 30278, 30315, 30348, 30642 KENWOOD 30038, 30041, 30067 KLH 30072 KNEISSEL 30037, 30278, 30348, 30352 KODAK 30037 KORPEL 30072 KYOTO 30072 LENCO 30278 LEYCO 30072 LG LIFETEC LINKSYS LLOYD'S LOEWE 30037, 30480 30348 31972 30000 30037, 30081, 30162, 31562 LOGIK 30072, 30106, 30240 LUX MAY 30072 LUXOR 30043, 30048, 30104, 30106, 30315 LXI 30037 M ELECTRONIC 30000, 30038 MAGNASONIC30278 MAGNAVOX 30000, 30081, 30642 MAGNIN 30240 MAGNUM 30642 MANESTH 30045, 30072, 30081 MARANTZ 30038, 30081 MARK 30000, 30278 MARTA 30037 MASTEC 30642 MASTER'S 30278 MATSUI 30240, 30348, 30352 MATSUSHITA 30162, 30226 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MEDION 30348, 30352, 30642 MELECTRONIC 30000, 30037, 30038 MEMOREX 30000, 30037, 30048, 30104, 30162, 30240, 30307, 30348 MEMPHIS 30072 METRONIC 30081 METZ 30037, 30081, 30162, 30226, 30347, 30836, 31562 MGA 30043, 30240 MGN TECHNOLOGY 30240 MICORMAY 30348 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 MINOLTA 30042 MITSUBISHI 30043, 30048, 30067, 30081, 30480, 30642 MOTOROLA 30048 MTC 30000, 30240 MULTITEC 30037 MULTITECH 30000, 30072 MURPHY 30000 MYRYAD 30081 NAD 30104 NAIKO 30348, 30642 NATIONAL 30226 NEBULA ELECTRONICS 30033 NEC 30037, 30038, 30041, 30067, 30104, 30278 NECKERMANN 30081 NESCO 30072 NIKKAI 30072, 30278 NIKKO 30037 NIKON 30034 NIVEUS MEDIA 31972 NOBLEX 30240 NOKIA 30041, 30042, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30106, 30240, 30278, 30315 NORDMENDE 30041, 30067, 30320, 30321 NORTHGATE 31972 OCEANIC 30000, 30041, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30106 OKANO 30072, 30278, 30315, 30348 OLYMPUS 30226 ONIMAX 30642 OPTIMUS 30037, 30048, 30104, 30162 ORBIT 30072 ORION 30348, 30352 OSAKI 30000, 30037, 30072 OSUME 30072 OTTO VERSAND 30081 PACE 30352 PACIFIC 30000, 30348, 30642 PACKARD BELL 31972 PALLADIUM 30037, 30041, 30072, 30348 PALSONIC 30000, 30072, 30642 PANASONIC 30162, 30226, 30836, 31244, 31562, 31807, 31808, 31809 PATHE CINEMA 30043 PATHE MARCONI 30041 PENNEY 30037, 30038, 30042, 30240 PENTAX 30042 PERDIO 30000 PHILCO 30038, 30072 PHILIPS 30081 PHOENIX 30278 PHONOLA 30081 PILOT 30037 PIONEER 30042, 30067, 30081, 30162 POLK AUDIO 30081 PORTLAND 30278, 30637 PRINZ 30000 PROFITRONIC 30081, 30240 PROLINE 30000, 30278, 30320, 30642 PROSONIC 30278 PROTEC 30072 PROTECH 30081 PROVISION 30278 PYE 30081 QUASAR 30162, 30278 QUELLE 30081 RADIALVA 30037, 30048 RADIOLA 30081 RADIONETTE 30037 RADIOSHACK 30000, 30037 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page ix Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM RADIX 30037 RANDEX 30037 RANK ARENA 30041 RCA 30042, 30048, 30106, 30240, 30320 REALISTIC 30000, 30037, 30048, 30104 REOC 30348 REX 30041 RFT 30072 RICAVISION 31972 RICOH 30034 ROADSTAR 30037, 30072, 30081, 30240, 30278 ROYAL 30072 SABA 30041, 30206, 30278, 30320, 30321 SAISHO 30348 SALORA 30043, 30104, 30106 SAMSUNG 30045, 30240 SANKY 30048 SANSUI 30000, 30041, 30067, 30072, 30106 SANYO 30048, 30067, 30104, 30240 SAVILLE 30240, 30278, 30352 SBR 30081 SCHAUB LORENZ 30000, 30041, 30104, 30106, 30315, 30348 SCHNEIDER 30000, 30037, 30042, 30072, 30081, 30240, 30278, 30348, 30352, 30642 SCOTT 30043, 30045 SEARS 30000, 30037, 30042, 30104 SEAWAY 30278 SEG 30072, 30081, 30240, 30278, 30637, 30642 SEI 30081 SELECO 30037, 30041 SEMP 30045 SENTRA 30072 SHARP 30037, 30048 SHINTOM 30072, 30104 SHIVAKI 30037 SHOGUN 30240 SIEMENS 30037, 30081, 30104, 30320, 30347 SIERA 30081 SILVA 30037 SILVER 30278 SINGER 30045, 30072 SINUDYNE 30081, 30352 SMARAGD 30348 SONNECLAIR 30072 SONTEC 30037 SONWA 30642 SONY 30000, 30032, 30033, 30034, 30106, 31032, 31636, 31972 SOUNDWAVE 30037, 30348 SSANGYONG 30072 STACK 9 STERN STS SUNKAI SUNSTAR SUNTRONIC SUNWOOD SUPRA SYLVANIA 31972 30278 30042 30278, 30348 30000 30000 30072 30037 30000, 30043, 30081 SYMPHONIC 30000 SYSTEMAX 31972 T+A 30162 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TANDBERG 30278 TANDY 30000, 30104 TASHIKO 30000, 30037, 30048, 30081, 30240 TATUNG 30000, 30041, 30043, 30048, 30081, 30348, 30352 TCHIBO 30348 TCM 30348 TEAC 30000, 30037, 30041, 30278, 30307, 30637, 30642 TEC 30072 TECH LINE 30072 TECHNICS 30081, 30162, 30226 TEDELEX 30642 TEKNIKA 30000, 30037 TELEAVIA 30041 TELEFUNKEN 30041, 30206, 30278, 30320, 30321, 30642 TELERENT 30226 TELETECH 30000, 30072, 30278 TENOSAL 30072 TENSAI 30000, 30072, 30278 TEVION 30348, 30642 TEXET 30278 THOMAS 30000 THOMSON 30041, 30067, 30278, 30320, 30321 THORN 30037, 30041, 30104 TMK 30240 TOKAI 30037, 30072 TOPLINE 30348 TOSHIBA 30041, 30042, 30043, 30045, 30081, 30352, 30828, 31008, 31972 TOTEVISION 30037, 30240 TOUCH 31972 TOWADA 30072 TRADEX 30081 UHER 30240 ULTRAVOX 30278 UNITECH 30240 UNITED 30348 UNIVERSUM 30000, 30037, 30081, 30104, 30106, 30240, 30348 VECTOR 30045 VECTOR RESEARCH 30038 VICTOR 30041, 30067 VIDEO CONCEPTS 30045 VIDEO TECHNIC 30000 VIDEOMAGIC 30037 VIDEOSONIC 30240 VIEWSONIC 31972 VILLAIN 30000 VOODOO 31972 WARDS 30000, 30033, 30038, 30042, 30045, 30048, 30072, 30081, 30240 WATSON 30081, 30352, 30642 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 30072, 30278, 30637 WORLD 30348 XR-1000 30000, 30072 YAMAHA 30038 YAMISHI 30072, 30278 YOKAN 30072 YOKO 30037, 30240 ZENITH 30000, 30033, 30034, 30637 ZT GROUP 31972 ZX 30348, 3035 DVD PLAYER 3D LAB 40539 A-TREND 40714 ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 40713, 40730, 41450 AEG 40770, 40788, 40790 AIRIS 40672, 41005, 41107 AIWA 40533, 40641 AKAI 40766, 40770, 40788, 40790, 40898, 41115, 41233 AKI 41005 AKURA 40898, 41140, 41170, 41233, 41367 ALBA 40539, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40730, 41140 ALCO 40790 ALIZE 41151 ALL-TEL 41451 ALLEGRO 40869 AMITECH 40770, 40850 AMOI 40852 AMPHION MEDIA WORKS 40872 AMSTRAD 40713 AMW 40872 ANSONIC 40759, 40831 APEX DIGITAL40672, 41004, 41020, 41833 ARIANET 40818 AUDIOSONIC 41265 AUDIOVOX 40790 AUVIO 40843, 41090 AVIOUS 41165 AXION 40730 BASE 41451 BASIC LINE 40713 BAZE 40898, 41165 BBK 40862 BEL CANTO DESIGN 41571 BELLAGIO 41004 BLACK DIAMOND 40713, 40766, 40833 BLUE PARADE40571 BLUE SKY 40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40804, 40843 BOGHE 41004 BOMAN 40898 BRAINWAVE 40770, 41115 BRANDT 40503, 40651 BROKSONIC 40695 BUSH 40516, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40730, 40831, 40833, 40879, 41128, 41165 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 41109 CCE 40730 CELESTIAL 41020 CENTREX 40672, 41004 CENTRUM 40713, 40779, 41005 CGV 40751, 41115 CINEA 40831, 40841 CINETEC 40713 CINEVISION 40833, 40869, 41483 CLASSIC 40730 CLATRONIC 40672, 40788, 40818, 41165 CLAYTON 40713 COBY 40730, 40852, 41107, 41165 CODEX 41233 COMPACKS 41107, 41265 CONIA 40852 CONTINENTAL EDISON 40831 CRAIG 40831 CROWN 40770, 41115 CRYPTO 41228 CYBERCOM 40831 CYBERHOME 40714, 40816, 41023 CYTRON 40651 D-VISION 41115 DAENYX 40872 DAEWOO 40705, 40714, 40770, 40833, 40869, 40872 DAEWOO INTERNATIONAL 40872 DALTON 41036, 41107 DANSAI 40770, 41115 DANTAX 40539, 40713, 40723, 40790 DAYTEK 40872, 41005 DAYTON 40872 DCE 40831 DECCA 40770, 41115 DENON 40490, 40634, 41282, 41634 DENVER 40788, 40898, 41107, 41165, 41450 DESAY 40843, 41090 APPENDIX-ix 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page x Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM DIAMOND 40651, 40768 DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 40833, 41483 DIGATRON 41009 DIGIHOME 40713 DIGITOR 41005 DIGITREX 40672 DIK 40831 DINAMIC 40788 DISNEY 40675 DIVIDO 40705 DK DIGITAL 40831 DMTECH 41271 DRAGON 40831 DREAMX 41151 DSE 40833, 41483 DUAL 40651, 40665, 40713, 40730, 40779, 40790, 40831 DURABRAND 40713, 40831 EASY HOME 40857 ECC 40730 ECLIPSE 40723, 40751 ELFUNK 40850 ELIN 40770 ELLION 40850 ELTA 40672, 40770, 40788, 40850, 41115, 41151 ELTAX 40766 EMERSON 40591, 40675, 40705 ENTERPRISE 40591 ENZER 41228 EUROLINE 40788, 41115, 41233 FENNER 40651 FERGUSON 40651, 40898 FINLUX 40591, 40672, 40741, 40751, 40770, 41165 FIRSTLINE 40713, 40843, 40869 FISHER 40670 FUNAI 40675, 40695 FUSION 40862 GE 40522 GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 40768 GO VIDEO 40741, 40744, 40833, 40869, 41075, 41483 GOLDSTAR 40591, 40741 GOODMANS 40651, 40713, 40723, 40730, 40790, 40833, 40879, 41004, 41140 GRAETZ 40665 GRAN PRIX 40831, 40898 GRANDIN 40713, 41233 GRUNDIG 40539, 40651, 40670, 40695, 40705, 40713, 40775, 40790, 41004, 41036, 41128 GRUNKEL 40770 H&B 40818, 40841, 40850, 41233 H&B 40713, 40818, 40841, 40850, 41233 HANSEATIC 40741, 40790 APPENDIX-x HARMAN/KARDON 40702 HCM 40788 HDT 40705 HENSS 40713 HIMAX 40843 HITACHI 40573, 40664, 40713 HITEKER 40672 HOEHER 40651, 40713, 40831 HOME ELECTRONICS 40730 HOME TECH INDUSTRIES 41107, 41451 HOYO 40665 HYUNDAI 40766, 40850, 41228 INGELEN 40788 INTEGRA 40627 ISP 40695 JATON 40665 JBL 40702 JDB 40730 JDV 41367 JMB 40695 JVC 40503, 40539, 40558, 40623, 40867 KANSAI 41107 KANSAS TECHNOLOGIES 41233 KAWASAKI 40790 KENDO 40713, 40831 KENNEX 40713, 40770, 40898 KENWOOD 40490, 40534 KIIRO 40770 KINGAVON 40818 KISS 40665, 40841, 41523 KLH 40790, 41020 KOSS 40651 KXD 40857 LAWSON 40768 LENCO 40651, 40713, 40770, 41165 LEXIA 40768 LG 40591, 40741, 40790, 40801, 40869 LIFETEC 40651, 40831 LIMIT 40768 LITEON 41058 LODOS 40713 LOEWE 40511, 40539, 40741 LOGIX 40705 LUKER 41367 LUMATRON 40695, 40705, 40741, 40833, 41115 LUNATRON 40741 LUXMAN 40573 LUXOR 40713, 41004 MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539, 40675, 40713, 41140 MAGNEX 40723, 41165 MAJESTIC 41107 MANHATTAN 40705, 40713 MARANTZ 40539 MARK 40713 MARQUANT 40770 MATSUI 40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 41004 MAXIM 40713, 40872 MBO 40730 MDS 40713 MECOTEK 40770 MEDION 40630, 40651, 40831, 40879, 41107, 41345 MEI 40790 MEMOREX 40695, 40831 METZ 40525, 40571, 40713 MICO 40723, 40751, 41223 MICROBOSS 40718 MICROMEDIA 40503, 40539 MICROMEGA 40539 MICROSOFT 40522 MICROSTAR 40831 MINAX 40713 MINERVA 40705 MINOKA 40770 MINOWA 41165 MIRROR 40879 MITSUBISHI 40713, 41521 MIZUDA 40770, 40818 MONYKA 40665 MPX 40843 MTLOGIC 41265 MUSTEK 40730 MX ONDA 40651, 40751, 41223 NAD 40741 NAIKO 40770, 41004, 41367 NEC 40785, 40869 NEOVIA 41271 NEUFUNK 40665 NEVIR 40770, 40831, 41197 NORCENT 40872, 41107, 41265 NORDMENDE 40831 NU-TEC 41228 OLIDATA 40672 ONKYO 40503, 40627, 40792 OPTIM 40843 OPTIMUS 40525 ORAVA 40818 ORBIT 40872 ORION 40695, 41006, 41128, 41233 ORITRON 40651 ORMOND 40713 P&B 40818, 41451 PACIFIC 40695, 40713, 40759, 40768, 40790, 40804, 40831 PACKARD BELL 40831 PALLADIUM 40695, 40779 PALSONIC 40672, 40852 PANASONIC 40490, 41282 PARAMOUNT PICTURES 40779 PEEKTON 40898 PHILCO 40788 PHILIPS 40503, 40539, 40675 PHILO 41345 PHONOTREND41165 PIONEER 40525, 40571, 41571 PLAYGO 41265 PLU2 40850, 41090 POLAROID 41020 POLK AUDIO 40539 PORTLAND 40770 POWERPOINT 40872 PRIMA 40766 PRIMA ELECTRONIC 40766 PRINZ 40831 PRISM 40705, 41006 PRO2 41107, 41345 PROLINE 40651, 40672, 40833, 41004 PROSCAN 40522 PROSON 40713 QWESTAR 40651 RADIONETTE 40741, 40869 RAITE 40665 RCA 40522, 40571, 40790 REC 40490, 40766 RED STAR 40759, 40763, 40770, 40788, 40898, 41107, 41345 REDSTAR 40763, 40898 REOC 40768 REVOY 40841 RIO 40869 ROADSTAR 40713, 40730, 40818, 40833, 40879, 40898, 41006 RONIN 40872 ROTEL 40558, 40623 ROWA 40516, 40872, 41004 SABA 40651 SAIVOD 40759, 40831, 41367 SALORA 40741 SAMSUNG 40490, 40573, 40744, 41075 SANSUI 40695, 40751, 40768 SANTOSH 41115 SANYO 40670, 40695, 40713, 40873 SCAN 40705, 40850 SCANMAGIC 40730 SCHAUB LORENZ 40770, 40788, 41115, 41151 SCHNEIDER 40539, 40651, 40705, 40713, 40779, 40788, 40790, 40804, 40831 SCIENTIFIC LABS 40768 SCOTT 40651, 40672, 40718, 41005, 41036, 41233 SEG 40665, 40713, 40763, 40768, 40872 SHANGHAI 40672 SHARP 40630, 40675, 40713, 41256 SHERWOOD 40741, 40770 SHINSONIC 40533 SILVA 40788, 40898 01EN_07_Code_RX-V659_G.fm Page xi Thursday, December 22, 2005 4:40 PM SILVA SCHNEIDER 40831, 40898 SINGER 40751 SKANTIC 40539, 40713 SKYMASTER 40730, 40768 SKYWORTH 40766, 40898 SLIDING 41115 SM ELECTRONIC 40730, 40768 SMART 40705, 40713, 40718 SONIC BLUE 40869 SONY 40533, 40573, 40772, 40864, 41033, 41633 SOUND COLOR 41233 SOUNDMASTER 40768 STANDARD 40651, 40768, 40788, 40831, 40898 STARLOGIC 41005 STARMEDIA 40818, 41005 STEVISON 41367 STRONG 40713 SUNKAI 40770, 40850 SUNSTECH 40831 SUNWOOD 40788, 40898 SUPERVISION 40768 SVA 40672 SYLVANIA 40675 SYMPHONIC 40675 SYNN 40768 TANDBERG 40713 TATUNG 40770 TEAC 40516, 40571, 40695, 40741, 40759, 40768, 40790, 40809, 40833, 41006, 41197, 41483 TEC 40898 TECHNICS 40490 TECHNIKA 40770, 40831, 41115, 41165 TECHNISSON 41115 TECHNOSONIC 40730, 41115 TECHWOOD 40713 TEDELEX 41228 TELETECH 40713, 40768 TENSAI 40651, 40770 TEVION 40651, 40833, 40898, 41036, 41170, 41382 THETA DIGITAL 40571 THOMSON 40522 TOKAI 40665, 40788, 40790, 40898 TOM-TEC 41450 TOSHIBA 40503, 40695 TRANS-CONTINENTS 40831, 40872, 41165, 41327 TREDEX 40804, 40843 TRUVISION 40857 UMAX 41151 UNITED 40672, 40695, 40788, 41115, 41165, 41228 UNIVERSUM 40591, 40713, 40741, 40779, 40790, 40869 UPTEK 40763 UPXUS 41345 URBAN CONCEPTS 40503 VENTURER 40790 VESTEL 40713 VIETA 40705, 41265 VIEWMASTER40862 VOXSON 40730, 40831 VTREK 41228 WAITEC 41151 WELKIN 40831 WELLINGTON 40713 WELTSTAR 40713 WHARFEDALE 40751, 40790 WILSON 40831, 41233 WINDSOR 40713 WINDY SAM 40573 WOXTER 41005, 41151 XBOX 40522 XENIUS 40790 XLOGIC 40768 XMS 40770 XORO 41183 YAKUMO 41004 YAMADA 40872, 41004, 41151 YAMAHA 40490, 40539, 41282, 41543 YAMAKAWA 40665, 40872 YUKAI 40730 ZENITH 40503, 40591, 40741, 40869 ZENNOX 41265 ZOECE 41265 LD PLAYER AIWA 40203 CARVER 40064, 40194 DENON 40059 FUNAI 40203 HARMAN/KARDON 40194 HITACHI 40395 KENWOOD 40258 MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217 MARANTZ 40064, 40194 MITSUBISHI 40059 NAD 40059 NAGSMI 40059 OPTIMUS 40059 PANASONIC 40204 PHILIPS 40064, 40194 PIONEER 40059 POLK AUDIO 40194 QUASAR 40204 REALISTIC 40203 SALORA 40064 SHARP 40001 SONY 40193, 40201 TECHNICS 40204 TELEFUNKEN 40059 THETA DIGITAL 40194 VICTOR 40245 WARDS 40059 YAMAHA 40217 DVD RECORDER APEX DIGITAL51056 BOGHE 51221 DENON 50490 DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 51730 DIGITREX 51056 DSE 51730 ELTAX 51321 FUNAI 50675 GATEWAY 51158 GO VIDEO 50741, 51158, 51730 H&B 51235, 51421 HITACHI 51664 JVC 51164, 51275 KREISEN 51421 LG 50741 LITEON 51158, 51416, 51440, 51456 LOEWE 50741 MAGNAVOX 50646 MEDION 51347 MICO 51221 MITSUBISHI 51403 MUSTEK 51730 NEC 51404 PANASONIC 50490, 51010, 51011 PHILIPS 50646, 51158, 51818 PIONEER 50631, 51475, 51476 RCA 50522 RELISYS 51347 SAMSUNG 50490 SENSORY SCIENCE51158 SHARP 50630, 50675, 51419, 51550, 51556 SINUDYNE 51221 SONY 51033, 51069, 51070, 51433 SYLVANIA 50675 TANGENT 51321 TEVION 51227 THOMSON 50551 TOSHIBA 51510 VICTOR 51275 XORO 51221 YAMADA 51056, 51158, 51416 YAMAHA 51544 ZENITH 50741 CD PLAYER ADC ADCOM ADVANTAGE AIWA AKAI 60018 60234 60032 60157 60156, 60362, 60643 ALTO 60625 ANAM 60362 ARCAM 60157 ARISTON 60625 AUDIO DYNAMICS 60018 AUDIO RESEARCH 60157 AUDIOLAB 60157 AUDIOMECA 60157 AUDIOTON 60157 BUSH 60643 CAIRN 60157 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 60029, 60303 CAMBRIDGE 60157, 60625 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 60625 CARVER 60157, 60179, 60299 CCE 60643 COPLAND 60393 CYRUS 60157 DENON 60003, 60034, 60626 DKK 60000 DMX ELECTRONICS 60157 DUAL 60003 ECLIPSE 60625 EROICA 60481 FIDELITY 60625 FISHER 60179 GARRARD 60393, 60643 GEMINI 60625 GENEXXA 60032, 60426 GOLDMUND 60157 GOLDSTAR 60643 GOODMANS 60362, 60625 GRUNDIG 60157 GTX 60362 HARMAN/KARDON 60157, 60173, 60426 HCM 60625 HIRO 60625 HITACHI 60032 INTEGRA 60101 KENWOOD 60028, 60157, 60190, 60626 KRELL 60157 KYOCERA 60018 LINN 60157 LG 71208 LOEWE 60157 LUXMAN 60093 MAGNAVOX 60157 MARANTZ 60029, 60157, 60626 MATSUI 60157, 60643 MCS 60029 MEMOREX 60032 MERIDIAN 60157 MICROMEGA 60157 MIRO 60000 MISSION 60157 MITSUBISHI 60156 MTC 60625 MUSICAL FIDELITY 60393 MYRYAD 60157 NAD 60000, 60299, 60721 NAGAOKA 60018 NAIM 60157 NAKAMICHI 60147 NEC 60234 NIKKO 60362, 60625 NSM 60157 ONKYO 60101, 61327 OPTIMUS 60000, 60032, 60179, 60426 ORION 60393 PANASONIC 60029, 60303 PHILIPS 60157, 60626 PINK TRIANGLE 60625 PIONEER 60032, 60101 POLK AUDIO 60157 PROTON 60157 QED 60157 APPENDIX-xi RX-V659_G_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, December 7, 2005 11:09 AM G CD RECORDER DENON HHB 70626, 70766 70192 JVC KENWOOD LG MARANTZ NAD PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SONY TDK TEAC VICTOR YAMAHA 71294 70626 71208 70626 71208 70626 70192, 71087 70420 70000 71208 70420 70072, 71294 70888, 71292 MD RECORDER DENON KENWOOD OPTIMUS PIONEER SHARP SONY TECHNICS YAMAHA 70873 70681 71063 71063 70861, 71684 70490 71078 70490, 70888, 71909 TAPE DECK AIWA 70029, 70197 AKAI 70189, 70283 ARCAM 70076 CARVER 70029 DENON 70076 EROICA 70189 GARRARD 70308, 70309 GRUNDIG 70029 HARMAN/KARDON 70029 INKEL 70070 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070, 70205 MAGNAVOX 70029 MARANTZ 70029 MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283 MYRYAD 70029 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027, 70220 ORION PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER POLK AUDIO RADIOLA RCA REVOX SANSUI SHARP SONY TEAC TECHNICS THORENS VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 70308, 70309 70229 70029, 70229 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70205, 70231 70170, 70243 70283, 70289, 70308, 70309 70229 70029 70244, 70273 70027, 70029 70097, 70205, 70524 TUNER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 81467 AIWA 80158, 80189 AKAI 80115, 80609 ANAM 80281, 80609 ARCAM 80189 CAIRN 80189 CAMBRIDGE 80189 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 81455, 81647 CARVER 80189 DENON 80004, 80273 DUAL 80004 GARRARD 80281 GOLDMUND 80189 GOLDSTAR 80281 GOODMANS 80609 GRADIENTE 80281 GRUNDIG 80189, 80281 HARMAN/KARDON 80110, 80189 INKEL 80027, 80066 JBL 80110 JVC 80074 KENWOOD 80027, 80645 © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA LG 80281 LINN 80189 LOEWE 80189 MAGNAVOX 80189 MARANTZ 80189 MEMOREX 80014 MICROMEGA 80189 MUSICAL FIDELITY 80445 MYRYAD 80189 NAD 80320, 80609 NIKKO 80609 ONKYO 80103, 80119 PANASONIC 80309, 80518 PHILIPS 80189 PIONEER 80014 POLK AUDIO 80189 RADIOLA 80189 RESTEK 80189 REVOX 80140, 80189 SANSUI 80189, 80609 SHERWOOD 80066 SIEMENS 80609 SONIC 80281 SONY 80158 SOUNDWAVE 80609 TEAC 80110, 80609 TECHNICS 80309, 80518, 81135 TECHWOOD 80281, 80609 THORENS 80189 UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281, 80609 VICTOR 80074 WARDS 80014, 80158, 80189 YAMAHA 80293, 81908 (TUNER ID1) 81916 (TUNER ID2) 81917 ZENITH 80281 RX-V659 QUAD 60157 QUASAR 60029 RADIOLA 60157 RADIOTONE 60625 RCA 60032, 60179 REALISTIC 60179 RESTEK 60157 REVOX 60157 ROTEL 60157, 60897 SAE 60157 SAMSUNG 60524 SANSUI 60157, 60625 SANYO 60179 SEG 60625 SHARP 60034 SHERWOOD 60426 SIEMENS 60157, 60362 SIMAUDIO 60157 SONIC FRONTIERS 60157 SONY 60000 STS 60018 SUPERTECH 60625 SYNERGY 60625 TAG MCLAREN 60157 TANDY 60032 TEAC 60362, 60393, 60625, 60643 TECHNICS 60029, 60207, 60303 TECHWOOD 60362 THORENS 60157 THULE AUDIO60157 TOSHIBA 60299, 60481 TRAXDATA 60626 UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362, 60524 WARDS 60000, 60032, 60157, 60179 YAMAHA 60036, 61907 YBA 60625 RX-V659 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 81981 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WG73810 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V659 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V659 Manuale del proprietario
- français: Yamaha RX-V659 Le manuel du propriétaire
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V659 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V659 Brugervejledning
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V659 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V659 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha RX-V659 Manualul proprietarului